JP7335711B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A conventional game machine is provided with sensors, which are a plurality of types of detection means for detecting various kinds of abnormalities, and inputs signals output from each sensor (detection means) to a control means. There is a system in which an abnormality is determined based on the received signal and an abnormality is reported (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-20021

However, in Patent Document 1, if the number of sensors (detection means) that detect an abnormality and output a signal increases, the number of input signals to the control means must be increased. If the number of input signals cannot be increased, there is a problem that the control means cannot execute abnormality control corresponding to the increased abnormality signals.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing abnormal control corresponding to an input signal without increasing the number of input signals to the control means. and

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a plurality of detection means including specific detection means;
interface means for receiving a detection signal output from the detection means, capable of detecting a predetermined abnormality related to the input, and capable of outputting a predetermined abnormality signal based on the detection of the predetermined abnormality;
combined signal output means for generating a combined signal by wired OR connection of the plurality of predetermined abnormal signals output from each of the plurality of interface means to which detection signals from the respective detection means are input;
a specific signal monitoring means for monitoring the output status of the detection signal output from the specific detection means;
game control means capable of executing abnormality control regarding an abnormality based on the composite signal output from the composite signal output means and the monitoring situation by the specific signal monitoring means;
Production control means capable of executing notification regarding abnormality;
with
The combined signal output means is
A first synthesis for generating a first synthesis signal by a wired OR connection of a plurality of the predetermined abnormal signals output from each of the plurality of interface means to which detection signals from the detection means provided in the first member are input. a signal output means;
A second synthesis for generating a second synthesized signal by a wired OR connection of the plurality of predetermined abnormal signals output from each of the plurality of interface means to which the detection signals from the detection means provided in the second member are input. a signal output means;
The first member is a member of a game board,
The second member is a member of a game machine frame,
The interface means can output a signal corresponding to the detection signal output from the detection means, and can output the predetermined abnormality signal regardless of whether or not the detection signal is output from the detection means,
The game control means is
Based on the first synthesized signal, as the first abnormality control, an abnormality notification signal is transmitted to the effect control means, and control is performed to prohibit execution of the game ,
Based on the second synthesized signal, a second abnormality notification signal is transmitted to the effect control means, but control to prohibit execution of the game is not performed,
When the specific signal monitoring means detects an abnormality in the output status of the detection signal output from the specific detection means, it transmits a third abnormality notification signal to the effect control means and controls to prohibit the execution of the game. conduct,
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 045SG),
A plurality of detection means (for example, six switches such as the first start switch 22A and the count switch 23 of the board side member, and the first out confirmation switch of the frame side member 4 switches such as 045SG21 and the first winning confirmation switch 045SG23),
A detection signal output from the detection means is input, and a predetermined abnormality related to the input (for example, disconnection (disconnection) or short circuit of the input side signal line) can be detected, and a predetermined abnormality signal based on the detection of the predetermined abnormality interface means (eg, interface integrated circuit 045SG30) capable of outputting (eg, anomaly detection signal);
A plurality of predetermined signals output from each of a plurality of interface means (for example, three interface integrated circuits 045SG30 to which six various switches provided on the board-side member are connected) to which detection signals from each detection means are input Composite signal output means for generating a composite signal (for example, B-IF signal) by wired OR connection of abnormal signals (for example, for wired OR connection for three B-IF signals provided corresponding to each interface integrated circuit 045SG30 switch 045SG41);
Specific signal monitoring means for monitoring the output status of the detection signal output from the specific detection means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 performs probability variable area signal monitoring processing in the main side error processing),
Based on the synthesized signal output from the synthesized signal output means and the monitoring status by the specific signal monitoring means, a control means (for example, an interface integrated circuit to which a probability variable area switch is connected) that can execute abnormality control related to abnormality Not only control to turn on the game prohibition flag by determining a board side interface error by the B-IF signal which is a wired OR signal of the abnormality detection signal of 045SG30, but also the probability variable area by the probability variable area signal in the probability variable area signal monitoring process A game control microcomputer 100) that performs control to turn on the game prohibition flag by determining that it is an error;
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately execute the abnormality control without increasing the number of input signals to the control means.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The control means monitors the output state in which the detection signal is continuously output from the specific detection means for a predetermined period (for example, one second) by the specific signal monitoring means (probability variable region signal monitoring processing). ) When an abnormality (for example, probability variable area error) is detected by abnormal control (for example, the game prohibition flag is turned on and an error designation command that notifies the probability variable area error is set to be transmitted) Execute control) It is characterized by
According to this feature, appropriate abnormality control corresponding to the specific detection means can be executed.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
Having a first member (e.g., board-side member) and a second member (e.g., frame-side member) different from the first member,
Each of the first member and the second member has a plurality of detection means (for example, six switches such as the first start switch 22A and the count switch 23 on the board side member, and the first out confirmation switch on the frame side member. 4 switches such as 045SG21 and first winning confirmation switch 045SG23) are provided,
The combined signal output means is
Each of a plurality of interface means (for example, three interface integrated circuits 045SG30 to which six various switches provided on the board-side member are connected) to which detection signals from the detection means provided on the first member are input. First synthesized signal output means (for example, provided corresponding to each interface integrated circuit 045SG30) for generating a first synthesized signal (for example, B-IF signal) by wired OR connection of the plurality of predetermined abnormal signals output from three B-IF signal wired-OR connection switches 045SG41);
Each of a plurality of interface means (for example, two interface integrated circuits 045SG30 to which four various switches provided on the frame-side member are connected) to which detection signals from the detection means provided on the second member are input Second synthesized signal output means (for example, provided corresponding to each interface integrated circuit 045SG30) for generating a second synthesized signal (for example, W-IF signal) by wired OR connection of the plurality of predetermined abnormal signals output from two W-IF signal wired-OR connection switches 045SG42);
including
The control means can execute the abnormal control based on the first synthesized signal and the second synthesized signal (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, for the B-IF signal, the main side error processing In contrast to executing the abnormal control for setting the transmission of the error designation command, for the W-IF signal, the part that executes the abnormal control for transmitting the error designation command in the W-IF signal determination process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the predetermined abnormality has occurred for each member.

The gaming machine according to means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 3,
The conditions under which the control means executes the abnormal control based on the first synthesized signal are different from the conditions for executing the abnormal control based on the second synthesized signal (for example, game control microcomputer 100 As for the B-IF signal, when it is determined that the B-IF signal is in the detection (L) state by the main side error processing, abnormal control is performed to transmit an error designation command that notifies the game prohibition and the board side interface error. On the other hand, with respect to the W-IF signal, when it is determined that the W-IF signal is in the detection (L) state in the W-IF signal determination process before the game is enabled by the timer interrupt, the game is executed. The part that executes error control to send an error designation command that notifies the frame side interface error without prohibiting it)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, more appropriate abnormality control can be executed according to each signal.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to means 4,
The condition is a first judgment timing (for example, when a game is enabled by a timer interrupt), which is a timing for judging whether or not to execute the abnormal control based on the first synthesized signal (for example, B-IF signal). A second decision time (for example, before a timer interrupt is set), which is a time to decide whether or not to execute the abnormality control, based on the condition of a timer interrupt during a period in which the timer interrupt is set and the second synthesized signal. (when play is not enabled); and
The first determination time and the second determination time are different.
According to this feature, since the condition includes the appropriate determination timing corresponding to each signal, the abnormality control can be executed more appropriately.

The gaming machine according to means 6 is the gaming machine according to means 4 or 5,
The first determination time is a plurality of timings for each predetermined period after the game becomes possible (for example, a plurality of times for each timer interruption during the period when the game is enabled by timer interruption). The second determination time is only once at a predetermined timing within the start-up period from when the power is turned on until the game becomes available (for example, one time at the execution timing of 045SGS01 before the processing of S11 where the timer interrupt is set). times only)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the abnormality control more appropriately by including the appropriate timing and number of times corresponding to each signal in the conditions.

The gaming machine according to means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 3 to 6,
The control means executes control to disable the game in the abnormal control based on the first synthesized signal (for example, B-IF signal) (for example, a portion that executes 045SGS40 processing in main side error processing).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute control that does not disable the game and control that disables the game according to the member, it is possible to execute appropriate abnormality control corresponding to the member.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a cut-in effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios in pattern CI-3 of the cut-in effect; 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; They are an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio of the advance notice effect and a determination ratio of the effect pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of an advance notice effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a notification mode of a variable display result for each variation pattern; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-1; 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a magnetic detector, a setting board and a main board; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of a magnetic detector. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of a magnetic detector. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining functions of input/output terminals of the magnetic detector; It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control structure of a control part. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the characterizing part 136IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the characterizing part 136IW. 4 is a time chart showing the relationship between detection of magnetic changes by a magnetic detector and various signals. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 149IW. It is a block diagram which shows the connection example of each detection means and main board|substrate in the characteristic part 149IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of the input port in the game control microcomputer. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 045SG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of connection between a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, and an interface integrated circuit in a characteristic portion 045SG; It is a figure which shows the structure of the interface integrated circuit used in the characteristic part 045SG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the status of each signal and the status of abnormality in the characteristic portion 045SG; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a connection example of each switch provided on the board-side member in the characteristic part 045SG; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a connection example of each switch provided on the frame-side member in the characteristic portion 045SG; It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the bit assignment of the input port in the microcomputer for game control used in the characteristic part 045SG. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 045SG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of processing by error (abnormality) determination in the characteristic portion 045SG; FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing main-side error processing in the characteristic part 045SG; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of processing by error (abnormality) determination in the characteristic portion 045SG; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, and interface integrated circuit in the characteristic portion 045SG; It is a figure which shows the relationship between the condition of each signal in a modification, and the condition of abnormality. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a connection example in the case where the vibration sensor is not mounted in the characteristic portion 045SG; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the connection of the radio wave sensor, the vibration sensor, and the interface integrated circuit in the characteristic portion 045SG; It is explanatory drawing which shows the connection example of each switch provided in the board|board side member in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the bit allocation of the input port in the microcomputer for game control.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern which are executed synchronously is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning mouth is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning mouth is also the same etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variable state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning gate, occurrence of winning, number of pending memories, game status), command to specify error occurrence (error specifying command), etc. included.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is in the OFF state and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. A provided reception flag is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 208SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing part 208SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-32.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 208SG003, a glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is a left game area 208SG002L by operating the ball operating handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 208SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 208SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 208SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 208SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting switching switch 208SG052 is accommodated in the substrate case 208SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting switching switch 208SG052 are housed in the substrate case 208SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the substrate case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 208SG003 is closed. The operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between an ON state and an OFF state, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 208SG201. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 208SG201. In other words, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 208SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the open sensor 208SG09 are in the ON state when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 as the set value change state. to be displayed. At this time, by operating the setting switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

By turning off the lock switch 208SG051 in a state in which any number from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the number displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. be done. When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 sends a set value designation command to the effect control board 12, regardless of whether a new set value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the setting value specifying command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 208SG025A, second reservation display 208SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 208SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 208SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state in which game balls are launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 208SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 208SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 208SG025A and the second suspension display 208SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 208SG025A and second pending display 208SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second LED from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 208SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 208SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 208SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 208SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321, and the second movable body 208SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. An origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 208SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach is executed, and the super reach in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a variation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, five or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β , super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment Super reach variation pattern special figure fluctuation time in which super reach effect such as super reach is executed Super reach δ, super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α in order of special figure fluctuation pattern is set long.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as the variation pattern of the super reach γ, after once notifying that the variable display result is a win as the reach performance of the super reach γ, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. There is provided a variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing a resurrection effect. For this reason, the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect is set to have a special figure variation time longer than the variation pattern of normal super reach γ and a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern of super reach δ. However, it is exceptionally the highest (100%) variation pattern for the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. Table, jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a losing variation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Figure 8-7 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-7 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-8 (E) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 8-9 (C) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-9 (F) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or short time state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (C), the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or short time state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state, "big hit" special figure assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" when the normal state or the time saving state is controlled to the big hit game state (this embodiment is 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6). In the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/160, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1 /140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state according to each setting value respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the set value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11 (A) and FIG. 8-11 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature part 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the resurrection effect are executed. Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) with resurrection effect, Super reach δ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6) for each variation pattern A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 51 to 200 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). 401 to 650 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) in which no resurrection effect is performed, and 651 to 700 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns in which resurrection effect is performed. (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined using one variation pattern determination table, that is, the pachinko Although a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the setting value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , the determination ratio of each variation pattern may be made different for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is super reach α. is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation ( PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Variation pattern of loss of reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of loss of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of loss of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of loss of super reach δ (PS2-5) , a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of deviation of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ (PA2-5) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for is possible is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2) , 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). , and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 850 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 851 to 930 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Variation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to super reach γ deviation variation patterns, and 971 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ deviation variation patterns, that is, if the variable display result is deviation, super reach Since the variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for loss is a variation pattern for loss of super reach α, a variation pattern for loss of super reach β, a variation pattern for loss of super reach γ, and a variation pattern for loss of super reach δ. Although each determination ratio exemplifies a form that is completely the same between each set value, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination rate of the pattern, the variation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ, and the variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ may be different for each set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the form of determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect is to be executed are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The general pattern holding storage unit stores the holding information of the general pattern game which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 208SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the game numbers by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Also, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting portion, data constituting a reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored. In the start winning command buffer, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4" area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. In addition, in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4" area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), or a pending memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer correspond to these commands, and the first special figure reservation storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the data separately from the drawing reserved storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted upward one by one as shown in FIG.

Effect control CPU120, at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening, stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage. I will go.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 208SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (208SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (208SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be possible to specify the number of the first special figure reservation memory. When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (208SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (208SGS503).

At 208SGS501a when the first starting port switch 22A is in the off state (208SGS501a; N), when the first special figure reservation storage number at 208SGS502 has reached the upper limit (208SGS502; Y), variable winning ball device Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (208SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 208SGS505, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (208SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (208SGS506).

In addition, when the second starting port switch is not in the ON state (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the starting prize determination process is terminated.

After executing either of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (208SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (208SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (208SGS516), the start prize determination process is performed. exit. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 208SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 208SG, when the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal process (step S22 in FIG. 5), the display corresponding to the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the set value Result determination table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10) is selected, and the selected display result determination table is used to set the special figure display result (variable display result of special symbols) as "jackpot" and the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not to control to a small hit game state as a determination of whether to control to a special figure display result as a "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 208SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 208SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state at machine 1 (208SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variable state (high probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is on, and the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is off and the time saving flag is on. It should be specified that it is in a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are in the off state.

Following the processing of 208SGS521, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) Set the display result determination table, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and the setting value is 2 And if the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2 and the game state is a variable If there is, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. ) to set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. to set.

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 4 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the setting value is 5 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (D), the set value is 6 and the game state is normal state or time saving state shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) Set the first special figure display result determination table, and set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 1 and if the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), the setting value is 2 and When the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (D), and if the setting value is 3 and the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) Set the table, if the set value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), set the set value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) is set, and if the set value is 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-10 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-10 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In addition, in the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table are compared with the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a big hit, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is out of the numerical range of the big hit determination value and out of the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined as lost.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined at 208SGS525 that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined not to be a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, when it is determined that it will be lost in the variable display (208SGS527;N), the first symbol designation, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not on (208SGS528; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for deviation shown in FIG. (208SGS528; Y), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14(D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined at 208SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (208SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), go to 208SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 208SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (208SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". Execute (208SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (208SGS532), and proceed to 208SGS536.

In addition, in this feature part 208SG, in these variation pattern determination table A to variation pattern determination table D for loss, a determination value of 1 to 700 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern in common. 701 to 997 are assigned super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Even if the number of pending memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used. is determined.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532, and 208SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (208SGS536). In this characteristic part 208SG, as shown in FIG. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

Incidentally, the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 8-17 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (208SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not ON at 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is ON (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not ON (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is ON (208SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer at the time of start winning, for one buffer number (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Then, according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command) and the data stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area (that is, the received variation pattern specification command) The display result of the decorative pattern (stopped pattern) is determined (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered as the stop pattern is displayed. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Also, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, for example, a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are arranged in an odd number other than "7" or "3" as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which the three patterns are "7" or "3" as the stop pattern (jackpot design). Also, if the received display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command indicating a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", three consecutive even numbers (or odd numbers ) and other decorative patterns (small winning patterns) are determined. When the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) different from the above-described big win patterns and small win patterns is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After executing 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach can be specified from the variation pattern designation command read in 208SG275. If the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; Y), cut for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in effect to be described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. In effect determination processing (208SGS278) is executed and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, at 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect (208SGS279). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-29, the notice effect is a effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. It is an effect that can be executed in the period from the time to the timing of reach.

After executing 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from among a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (208SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208SGS285).

8-18 to 8-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). If the variation pattern is a super reach α or super reach β variation pattern (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern is a super reach γ or super reach δ variation pattern (208SGS301; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (208SGS302).

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the variation pattern is PB1-5, that is, whether it is the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect (208SGS303). . When the variation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the jackpot type (208SGS304), and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). .

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. proceed to In addition, in 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Note that the cut-in effect in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIGS. and prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to patterns.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w with a blue effect, and the effect pattern is If it is pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x with a red effect. If the production pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005z with a rainbow effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS307), Go to 208SGS308. In addition, in 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10%. determined by the ratio of Also, as a cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), and terminates the cut-in effect determination process.

Also, in 208SGS303, if the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the pachinko game machine 1. (208SGS311), and determines whether or not the specified setting value is one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103 .

In addition, when execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the cut-in effect start waiting timer times out, a cut-in effect process table corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table each time the variable display effect process is executed. 9, etc.) to execute the cut-in effect.

If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), a cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. 208SGS3316 determines the presence/absence of and effect pattern (208SGS3316), and executes the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In addition, in the 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in Non-execution of production is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in the 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. Runs are determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure. The presence or absence of performance execution and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), in 208SGS318, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is reduced to 55% based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result being a failure. Decide on a percentage. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4. (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS325), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 8-21(C), based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS324; N), based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. Incidentally, in 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 8-21(C), based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high probability high base state (208SGS327). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS327; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-accuracy-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS329), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the setting value is 4, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5. (208SGS330). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether the big win type is a big win A or a big win B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS334), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 8-21(D), based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS333; N), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-21(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high probability high base state Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 35%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5 and the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS338), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the setting value is 5, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the variable It is determined whether or not the displayed result is a big hit (208SGS339). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS342), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS341; N), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-21(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS344). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS344; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-accuracy-high-base state, cut Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6 and the variable display result is out and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS346), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the setting value is 6, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variation pattern of super reach δ is (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). . Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. 208SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 8-22, 208SGS354 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS353; N), based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS355), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is performed. to run. Incidentally, in 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-22, based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a failure (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. process. Incidentally, in 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-22, based on the result of the variable display being a failure, the cut-in effect is decided not to be executed at a rate of 35%. Also, as the execution of cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the performance is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big win (the degree of expectation of the big win) is the lowest, and when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, it is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Big hit expectation in cut-in effect: non-execution<pattern CI-1<pattern CI-2<pattern CI-3<pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-4, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win C.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-21, 8-22 and 8-24, the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 when performing variable display with the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ. The execution ratio is set to be the lowest (0%) when the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern is super reach γ deviation/super reach δ deviation. Then, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ jackpot for executing the resurrection performance, the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern does not execute the resurrection performance - the super reach γ jackpot/super reach δ jackpot, the set value. is 4 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 5 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 6 and the variation pattern. is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to increase.

Also, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3, When the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3, while it is determined that the variable display result will be a big win (any of the big wins A to C), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. is 4 to 6, even if the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result may be wrong. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3. The expectation of a big hit is set low when the effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect of super reach γ is executed, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be any one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, if we focus on the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 more than the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) that executes the resurrection effect. and pattern CI-4 are set low. Therefore, in the case where the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the cut-in effect is executed in CI-3 and the failure is notified, so that the pachinko game machine In spite of the player recognizing that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the resurrection performance is executed later and the big win is notified, thereby pachinko. This prevents the player from being discouraged when the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, which becomes indefinite.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. If you pay attention to it, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the same for all set values, but when the variable display result is a loss. , the higher the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 (the ratio of execution of pattern CI-3 at the time of failure when setting values are 4 to 6: setting value 4 < setting value 5<setting value 6).

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is different. Since the frequency becomes higher, the player can expect that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. there is

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. , if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display results are different, if the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the game state is the low-probability-high-base state or the low-probability The pattern CI-3 is set to perform the cut-in effect at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-probability-high base state, and the variable display result is lost, so that the game state is low-probability. Since the pachinko game machine 1 is set to one of the set values 4 to 6 even after shifting to the low base state, the player can be urged to continue the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. ing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21(B) to 8-21(E), focusing on the case where the variable display result is lost, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the cut-in. The performance execution ratio is set high. In other words, in the present characteristic portion 208SG, it is suggested that any of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is lost. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed. It is possible to improve a game interest.

8-21 and 8-22 are merely examples, and the determination ratio of the cut-in effect pattern is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. You may make it differ from the characteristic part 208SG suitably. However, if the determination ratio of the effect pattern of these cut-in effects is appropriately changed, the tendency of the degree of expectation of the jackpot of each effect pattern (the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the cut-in effect: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself is maintained so that a player does not misunderstand the degree of expectation for a big win according to the production pattern of the cut-in production when the cut-in production is executed. is desirable.

Further, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this example, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the setting value set in the variable display and the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super In the case of performing variable display with the variation pattern of reach γ or super reach δ, cut-in effect may be performed without fail during the variable display. In this way, when the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, The percentage assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect when the variable display result is a loss (see FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the characteristic portion 208SG. By doing so, it is possible to improve interest by executing cut-in effects during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, while preventing excessive cut-in effects from being executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-17. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a loss (208SGS362; N), execution of cut-in effect is further determined. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not any cut-in effect pattern is stored (208SGS363).

If execution of cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored effect pattern of cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364 ). If the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big win (208SGS366; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS367), and whether or not to execute the notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big win type (208SGS368).

Also, if the variable display result is a failure (208SGS366; N), the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Incidentally, as described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost is set to the pachinko game machine 1. This is the case where the set value is any one of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4) fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26(C) and 8-30, pattern YE-1 is a production pattern for displaying an image 208SG005s of character A on the image display device 5 with a blue effect. , and pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern in which the image 208SG005t of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with a red effect, and pattern YE-3 is a effect pattern in which the image 208SG005u of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying a collective image 208SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 with a rainbow color effect.

Further, in the process of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), the non-execution of the notice effect is reduced by 50%. Decide on a percentage. In addition, as execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also,
Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach loss), non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is patterned. When executed in YE-1, when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-2, when the notice effect is executed in YE-3, when the notice effect is executed in YE-4. It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit is high (Expectation of the big hit of the advance notice effect: non-execution of notice effect <execution in pattern YE-1<execution in pattern YE-2<execution in pattern YE-3<pattern YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when it is determined that the cut-in effect is not to be executed, or the cut-in effect is a pattern CI- in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the pattern CI-3 and the pattern CI-4. 1 or pattern CI-2 is determined, there is provided a case where the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is jackpot C. For this reason, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, it is also determined whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to attract people's attention.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, or a variable display result is a big hit as an effect pattern of cut-in effect. In the case where the pattern CI-4 that determines that the jackpot type is the jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 will be used as the effect pattern of the notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the variation pattern. It is set to never run. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only with pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, so that the cut-in effect is started when the variable display result is a big hit. This prevents the player from recognizing it at a timing (starting timing of the advance notice effect) before the timing. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss, both the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect are not executed in a pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, so the player is excessively concerned about the variable display result being a big win. It is prevented to expect

After executing any of the processes 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern decided by the processing of any one of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to give the notice. The effect determination process is ended (208SGS372). When it is decided not to execute the notice effect (208SGS370; N), the notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

It should be noted that, when the execution of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer waiting for the start of the notice effect by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for advance notice performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for the notice effect each time the variable display effect process is executed. etc.) can be used to execute the forewarning effect.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. In the fluctuation pattern of loss, the notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during variable display, and in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display. 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display from pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. 3 is executable. It should be noted that, in the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the normal reach, the loss of the super reach α, and the loss of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8-28, in the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, it is possible to execute the notice effects in patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. , cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-3 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the notice effect is performed in patterns YE-1 to YE-1 in the period before the reach. Pattern YE-4 can be executed, and cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when executing the variable display in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-30 to 8-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-30(A) to 8-30(E), when execution of the announcement effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the image display device 5 performs the announcement effect in the pattern YE-. 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 with a blue effect, and when the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2 , the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and when the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays a collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit according to which of the character images 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, and 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is and the color of the effect displayed together with the character image. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the notice effect is executed only in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach γ, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) to FIG. A ready-to-reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight in this characteristic portion 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-31(D), when it comes time to start executing the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player , prompting to operate the push button 31B is performed. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. When the acceptance period has passed, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 along with a cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1,
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and a cut-in effect is performed. When the in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed with a golden effect on the image display device 5, and when the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 A cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can determine which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z the cut-in images displayed on the image display device 5 are, and the colors of the effects displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern), super reach γ As a result of the ready-to-win effect (battle effect), the ally character loses to the enemy character, and it is notified that the result of the variable display is lost, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect) , as a result of ready-to-reach effect (battle effect result) of super reach-gamma, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character wins over the enemy character, and the variable display ends.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A), 8-32 (D) to 8-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection effect variation pattern), it is once notified that the variable display result is lost when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ. Then, by executing the resurrection effect, it is once again notified that the variable display result is a big hit by the ally character winning against the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, Variable display ends.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach δ, after the decoration pattern is displayed in combination with the reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same way as the reach performance of super reach γ. battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. It should be noted that the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach δ may be produced in the same manner as the battle production as the ready-to-reach production of super reach γ. may

As described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. While it is determined that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing at -3, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a cut-in effect is performed. There is a case where the variable display result is out of line when the pattern CI-3 is executed. In other words, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. , when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not, and the amusement of the game can be improved. there is

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern to execute revival presentation, PB1-5) and super ready-to-win not to perform revival presentation to inform that the variable display result is a big win by executing revival presentation γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) are provided, and when variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the revival performance, the super reach γ jackpot variation that does not execute the revival performance. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. For this reason, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is not displayed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by the player. is any one of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to 4 to 6 by executing the resurrection performance and announcing that the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest in the game due to an error in recognizing that it is any of the above.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, disadvantageous set values are set to 1 to 3, and advantageous set values are set to 4 to 6, which are set in the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on whether the set value is a disadvantageous set value or an advantageous set value, the decision ratio of the cut-in effect or the notice effect pattern is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the unfavorable setting value is 1 and the advantageous setting value is 6, the values may be set in any range that does not overlap each other. Specifically, only 1 to 5 disadvantageous setting values and 6 advantageous setting values may be used, or only 1 disadvantageous setting value and 2 to 6 advantageous setting values may be used.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect in the present invention is described as a ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effect other than the ready-to-win effect, such as a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop and the re-variable display of the decorative symbols are repeatedly executed, may be used as long as the effect can be executed immediately.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the deviation of the super reach γ When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game is performed. When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is wrong, and the higher the setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since the player can expect the setting, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern. shows a form in which the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, the pachinko game Regardless of the setting value set in machine 1, the rate at which the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 may be the same rate. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify a person.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and FIG. 8-13 As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big win, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using one big win variation pattern determination table regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the ratio of executing the resurrection performance during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the execution ratio of the resurrection performance during the variable display follows the set value for determining the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit, the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection performance is executed during the variable display. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute any reach effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are exemplified in a form that is previously determined in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect can be changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be determined as appropriate from the display result or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-22, as the variation pattern in the feature part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result always becomes a big hit, so the variations of the super reach effect increase and the super Since the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the reach δ, and the variable display result can make the player pay attention to whether or not the result will be a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, an example is provided in which variation patterns (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state (or until the end timing of the variable display) and a ready-to-reach state. A cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect is provided. Furthermore, the advance notice effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) with different degrees of expectation for big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high expectation of a big win. When executing the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot. By executing YE-3 or YE-4, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the notice effect pattern YE-1 or YE-2. It is possible to keep the player's attention until the end of the variable display, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, during the variable display of 1, the notice effect is set at a timing before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). When the variable display result becomes a big win, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big win from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest by preventing this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the form in which the announcement effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect during the variable display executed before the variable display for executing the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect, so that the variable display result is obtained during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing that is a big hit and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display result is a big win, the big win type is always the big win C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is set to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. In the case of losing, the player can be made to think that even if the player wins a big win, it might have been a big win A or B. can reduce the decrease in

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26, one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is When there is a possibility of losing), when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, when the advance notice performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Since the production pattern is determined from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, by executing the advance notice production in pattern YE-3 and YE-4 It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not result in a big hit, the pattern CI-3 and the pattern YE-3 or YE-4 are executed during the same variable display, so that the variable display result becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations of

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, one of 4 to 6 is set as the setting value for the pachinko game machine 1, and the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3, which is a effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. As a mode for restricting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the notice effect when the execution of is made unexecutable in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4), but the present invention is not limited to this. is set, and when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit, the advance notice effect is performed at a rate lower than that of pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. Pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 may be executable. In other words, "when the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is performed in a mode including the specific effect. If executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted." A mode in which patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed at a lower rate than in YE-2 is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is a variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. In the case, if the set value is the same value, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state is the cut-in effect in the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state. It is set higher than the rate of execution in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is a high-probability-high base state, cut-in production is performed in the variable display of super reach γ out more than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state. Since the pattern CI-3 is executed more frequently, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 in the high-probability-high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state. can improve the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 because the player can easily continue the game even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is performed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. When it is executed, if the game state is a high-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut-in at a higher rate than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state Although a form in which the effect can be executed in pattern CI-3 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , and when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. If the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 208SG described above, as shown in FIG. 4 and PB1-4) exemplified a form in which the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than in the case of executing variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) to 8-33 (E) as a modification 208SG-1, when executing variable display in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, cut The IN effect may be disabled in pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, any one of 4 to 6 is set to the pachinko game machine 1 as the set value. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement in a game due to the execution of a resurrection performance and the notification that the result of variable display is a big hit despite the player's recognition that it is set.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 136IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 136IW will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a block diagram showing an example of the magnetic detector, setting board and main board. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the main board 11 is connected to the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 via the setting board 136IW300. The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are sensors for detecting fraudulent operation using a magnet outside the pachinko game machine 1, and when an external magnetic field due to fraudulent operation is detected, game control An error signal is output to the microcomputer 100 for use. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives an error signal, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and a communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer are used to notify managers such as hall staff of pachinko. Abnormality notification processing for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game machine 1 is executed.

For example, the game control microcomputer 100, in the main side error processing of step S22, the state where the error signal from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 corresponds to magnetic field detection (magnet detection) (for example, high level). Hereinafter, when the error signal is in a state corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection), it is said that the error signal is being output. , low level) means that the error signal is not output.

If an error signal is output, an abnormality notification process is executed to notify that an abnormality has been detected. In this characteristic portion 136IW, as an abnormality notification process, the game control microcomputer 100 displays an image indicating, for example, "magnet discovery" or an image indicating an abnormality detection on the image display device 5 with respect to the effect control board 12. control. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 causes the performance control board 12 to output sound number data corresponding to the abnormality notification sound to the sound control board 130, and outputs the abnormality notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, in the information output process of step S23, the game control microcomputer 100 performs a process of transmitting information including identification information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which an abnormality has been detected to the hall management computer via the communication section. conduct.

If a magnet that may be used for cheating such as illegally guiding game balls to the winning area or a magnet that is used for cheating is found by the abnormality notification process as described above, In the pachinko game machine 1, an abnormal state is displayed on the image display device 5, and an abnormality notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A notification is also sent to the hall management computer.

The abnormality notification process executed when an error signal is output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 may include notification of an abnormality using only the image display device 5, the use of the speaker 8L, It is possible to adopt an appropriate form, such as an abnormality notification using only 8R. In addition, it is possible to perform abnormality notification using other production devices (for example, light emitters such as LEDs), and to use the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and other production devices (for example, light emitters such as LEDs). may be used together.

In addition, in this characterizing section 136IW, this abnormality notification process is executed by the game control microcomputer 100, but the abnormality notification process includes the production control microcomputer 100 and other components other than the game control microcomputer 100. It may be executed using

In this characteristic part 136IW, when an error signal is output from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101, the abnormality notification process continues until a manager such as a hall staff performs a predetermined cancellation operation. is executed. In addition, the abnormality notification process is continuously executed until the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, or when the output of the error signal from the first magnetic detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 disappears It is possible to adopt various forms of continuation, such as terminating anomaly notification (when the error signal becomes a state corresponding to non-detection of a magnetic field (non-detection of a magnet)).

In this characteristic portion 136IW, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are set to supply power to the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101, and to set the effective detection direction. A setting board 136IW300 for this is connected. Although the characteristic portion 136IW has a configuration in which two magnetic detectors are provided, a configuration in which one magnetic detector is provided, or a configuration in which three or more magnetic detectors are provided may be employed. good too.

The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 of this characteristic part 136IW are configured such that two of the six surfaces formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape (first mounting surface S1, second mounting surface S2) are used in the pachinko game machine. 1 can be used as a mounting surface. The selection of the mounting surface (selection of the mounting mode) is selected according to the situation of the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 which differs for each model of the pachinko game machine 1 . In this characteristic part 136IW, when one of the two mounting surfaces is selected, the mounting area for the pachinko game machine 1 (equivalent to the area of the mounting surface), the protrusion amount of the magnetic detector on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 Since the lead-out direction of the cable led out from the cable lead-out hole of the magnetic detector is different, it is possible to cope with the situation behind the pachinko game machine 1 . Here, a coordinate system is defined for the magnetic detector. The x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis are defined so that the first mounting surface S1 is parallel to the xy plane and the second mounting surface S2 is parallel to the zx plane.

The first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 of the characteristic portion 136IW can detect the mutually orthogonal x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis as magnetic detection directions. Specifically, the x-axis sensor mounted on the magnetic detector detects magnetism in the x-axis direction, the y-axis sensor detects magnetism in the y-axis direction, and the z-axis sensor detects magnetism in the z-axis direction. To detect. The magnetic detector of this characteristic portion 136IW can set two of the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis as effective detection directions. That is, it is possible to set any one of the xy plane and the zx plane as an effective plane for detecting magnetism. The setting of the effective plane in this characteristic portion 136IW is realized by the circuit configuration (hardware specifications) of the setting board 136IW300, but the setting of the effective plane can also be performed by mechanical switches provided on the setting board 136IW300 or the magnetic detector. It is possible to adopt various forms such as performing by switching (hardware specification), or performing program processing of the game control microcomputer 100 or the performance control microcomputer 100 (software specification).

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the first magnetic detector 136IW100 together with the setting board 136IW300 and the main board 11. As shown in FIG. Although FIG. 9B only shows the configuration of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, the configuration of the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is the same as that of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, so the illustration is omitted. ing. Hereinafter, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101 are also collectively referred to simply as magnetic detectors.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, in this characteristic portion 136IW, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 includes a magnetic detection element 136IW110 and a control circuit 136IW120. The control circuit 136IW120 includes an AD converter 136IW121 and a control section 136IW122. The AD converter 136IW121 converts the detection voltage, which is an analog signal output from the magnetic detection element 136IW110, into a digital signal. Further, the control circuit 136IW120 can execute averaging processing, reference value setting processing, effective surface setting processing, and comparison processing. A microcontroller that performs control operations according to a program can be used for the control circuit 136IW120. When using a microcontroller as the control circuit 136IW120, each of the processes described above is implemented by a program.

The magnetic detection element 136IW110 detects changes in impedance due to magnetic fields externally applied to amorphous wires arranged along three axes (x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis) that are orthogonal to each other. It is configured to output a detection voltage, and the control circuit 136IW120 has a function of outputting a channel signal to the magnetic detection element 136IW110. Which of the x-axis detection element (x-axis sensor), the y-axis detection element (y-axis sensor), and the z-axis detection element (z-axis sensor) outputs the detection voltage for the channel signal is a signal for selecting the

The averaging process is a process of time-averaging the detected voltage values output by the first magnetic detector 136IW100. The reference value setting process is a process of setting a reference value for detecting the synthetic magnetic field change amount based on the detection voltage output by the first magnetic detector 136IW100. The effective plane setting process is a process of setting an effective plane having two axes as effective detection directions among three axes of magnetic detection directions output by the magnetic detection element 136IW110. In this characteristic portion 136IW, one of two planes parallel to the xy plane and the zx plane is set as an effective plane according to the manner in which the magnetic detector is attached. The comparison process is a process of outputting an error signal to the game control microcomputer 100 when the amount of change in the synthetic magnetic field on the effective plane exceeds the threshold value for fraud detection determination using a magnet.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, in this characteristic portion 136IW, the setting board 136IW300 receives the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Power supply voltage is supplied to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) based on the supplied power supply voltage, and each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW100). It has a function of outputting a selection signal Sa for selecting the effective detection direction corresponding to the detector 136IW101). In other words, the setting board 136IW300, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the magnetic detector CLRT signal is not input from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each magnetic detector is not supplied with the power supply voltage, and the selection signal Sa is not output.

Setting board 136IW300, based on the input of the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), to each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101) It is configured with a transistor that switches the supply of power supply voltage from an off state to an on state. In addition, the setting board 136IW300, based on the input of the magnetic detector CLRT signal from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detection 136IW101) and converts it into a selection signal Sa according to the setting of the device 136IW101). The capacity of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 is limited on the main board 11, but in the characteristic part 136IW, various settings of each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) can be set by the setting board 136IW300. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 100 .

This characteristic portion 136IW is configured to supply power to a plurality of magnetic detectors based on the input of one magnetic detector CLRT signal. The processing load on the control microcomputer 100 and the like can be reduced. In addition to the configuration example shown in the characteristic portion 136IW, in order to individually control the power supply to a plurality of magnetic detectors, a plurality of transistors capable of switching the supply of the power supply voltage between the ON state and the OFF state may be provided. can be In this case, the magnetic detector CLRT signal may be individually input to each transistor, or when one magnetic detector CLRT signal is input, each transistor turns off the supply of the power supply voltage to the corresponding magnetic detector. It may be configured to switch from the state to the on state.

In this characteristic portion 136IW, when the supply of power supply voltage to each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101) is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The ON state continues until it is stopped. Control may be performed to switch the supply of power supply voltage to the detector from an on state to an off state, control may be performed to prevent output of an error signal from each magnetic detector, or an error signal may be output. Control may be performed such that the abnormality notification process is not performed even if the abnormality notification process is performed. Such control can be realized by program processing (software specification) of the game control microcomputer 100, the performance control microcomputer 100, and the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate abnormality notification from being made due to a magnetic field change due to the game machine frame 3 being in an open state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 136IW, a magnetic detector CLRT signal is output by program processing (software specification) of the game control microcomputer 100, and each magnetic detector (first magnetic detector 136IW100 and second magnetic detector 136IW101 ) is switched from an off state to an on state, other configurations may be employed. For example, output signals from the door opening sensor 136IW090 and the setting key 136IW051 (details of which will be described later) of the characteristic portion 136IW are input to the main board 11, but are also branched and input to the setting board 136IW300. When both the door open sensor 136IW090 and the setting key 136IW051 are in the OFF state, the setting board 136IW300 supplies power supply voltage to each magnetic detector (the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101). A circuit configuration (hardware specification) for turning on may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the game control microcomputer 100 .

In this characteristic part 136IW, the setting board 136IW300 controls the power supply to each magnetic detector, but other parts (for example, solenoids 81 and 82, a motor for driving the movable body 32, various switches, etc.) Specifically, it may be configured to control power supply to solenoids (34V), motors (12V, 15V, 18V, 20V), switches (12V), etc.). That is, the setting board 136IW300 that controls power supply need not be dedicated to the magnetic detector. In this characteristic portion 136IW, the parts for control such as the transistor of the setting board 136IW300 are divided, but the voltage supplied to the magnetic detector is applied to other parts (for example, the solenoids 81 and 82 and the movable motor for driving body 32).

In this characteristic portion 136IW, the power supply to the magnetic detector is controlled through the route of the main substrate 11→the relay substrate (in this example, the setting substrate 136IW300) having the function of controlling the power supply→the magnetic detector. However, the power supply to the magnetic detector is controlled through the following route: main substrate 11 → power supply substrate having a function to control power supply → main substrate 11 (or relay substrate) → magnetic detector. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Specifically, in the power supply board, after the AC power supply (AC24V) is changed to the DC voltage (DC34V), the power supply for the magnetic detector may be directly generated. Alternatively, a control signal may be output. That is, when a control signal is input from the main board 11 to the power supply board, the magnetic detector power generated on the power supply board may be supplied to the magnetic detector. In addition, when controlling the generation of a dedicated voltage from the main board 11 to the power supply board, not only the magnetic detector but also various switches for detecting game balls and vibration sensors for detecting vibration of the game machine can be used. , the power supply to a solenoid, a motor, or the like may be controlled. In this case, power is supplied to the target part when it is desired to control the action in terms of progress and control of the game.

FIG. 9-3 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the magnetic detector, and FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram explaining the functions of the input/output unit (input/output terminal) terminals of the magnetic detector. The first magnetic detector 136IW100 of the characteristic portion 136IW is a device including a magnetic detection element 136IW110 and a control circuit 136IW120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-3, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 includes a magnetic detection element 136IW110, a control circuit 136IW120, and an externally input voltage of +12 V that is stabilized and supplied to the magnetic detection element 136IW110 and the control circuit 136IW120. a buffer circuit 136IW186 for inputting a selection signal Sa (input from SELECT) and outputting it to the control circuit 136IW120; and an output transistor 136IW184 for outputting an error signal.

In this characteristic portion 136IW, there are Hi (eg, power supply voltage 12 [V]) and Low (eg, 0 [V] GND) as the selection signal Sa, and the SELECT terminal is Hi (eg, power supply voltage 12 [V] ) is supplied, the same power supply as the power supply whose power supply to the 12V terminal is controlled is supplied. Such a configuration can prevent the wiring from becoming complicated. A dedicated power supply may be provided for each of the characteristic portions 136IW without being limited to the configuration example of the characteristic portion 136IW. With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect of improving the detection accuracy of the magnetic detector and the effect of suppressing the occurrence of malfunction.

In this characteristic portion 136IW, the software of the microcontroller that implements the control circuit 136IW120 eliminates variations in sensor characteristics and the effects of geomagnetism. Specifically, the detection voltage is input from the magnetic detection element 136IW110 when power supply to the magnetic detector is started, and the reference value is set based on the input detection voltage. Then, the amount of change from the reference value of the detected voltage from the magnetic detector for the effective plane (the amount of change in the synthetic magnetic field) is calculated, and when the amount of change exceeds the threshold, it is determined that the magnet exists in the vicinity of the pachinko game machine 1. It judges and outputs an error signal. Incidentally, by appropriately correcting the set reference value, it is also possible to cope with changes in the environment due to magnetization of the electromagnetic parts or the like.

FIG. 9-5 is a block diagram showing a control configuration example of the control unit 136IW122. The control circuit 136IW120 of the characteristic portion 136IW includes magnetic field variation calculators 136IW202x, 202y, and 202z corresponding to the x-, y-, and z-axes, a combined vector calculator 136IW233, and a magnetic field detector 136IW234. ing. The magnetic field change amount calculators 136IW202x, 202y, and 202z execute a monitoring process of monitoring magnetic field change amounts (changes in the ambient magnetic field) in each axial direction based on the output of the magnetic detection element 136IW110. The synthetic vector calculation unit 136IW233 calculates the amount of synthetic magnetic field change in a plane formed by two axes based on the amount of magnetic field change in each axial direction. The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 compares the synthetic magnetic field change amount in a certain plane (the plane set by the selection signal Sa) with a threshold value, and when the threshold value is exceeded, the magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 performs detection processing to output an error signal indicating an illegal magnetic field change. Execute. In the characteristic part 136IW, the monitoring process and detection process are executed by the control part 136IW122 in the magnetic detector. Alternatively, one of the monitoring process and the detection process may be performed by a device other than the magnetic detector. In the case of using a device other than the magnetic detector, the game control microcomputer 100 in the pachinko game machine 1, the effect control microcomputer 100, etc. may be used.

The magnetic field change amount calculation units 136IW 202x, 202y, and 202z calculate reference values for the detected voltage values of the x-axis sensor, the y-axis sensor, and the z-axis sensor, respectively, and calculate the current detected voltage value (averaged detected voltage value). and the reference value, that is, the amount of change in the magnetic field is calculated for each axis. FIG. 9-5 shows a configuration example of the magnetic field change amount calculation unit 136IW202x for the x-axis. is the same as the configuration example of .

The control unit 136IW122 sequentially selects data output from the x-axis sensor, y-axis sensor, and z-axis sensor and digitized by the AD converter 136IW121 at a cycle of 2 ms. That is, the data of the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis are input to the control unit 136IW122 every 2ms. The data of each axis is input to the corresponding magnetic field change amount calculation units 136IW202x to 202z, and the magnetic field change amount is calculated for each axis.

The data input to the magnetic field variation calculator 136IW202x is stored in the register 136IW251, and is sequentially shifted and transferred to the registers 136IW252 to 258 in the next stage every 2 ms. The data stored in the final stage register 258 is discarded each time new data is shifted. The first averaging unit 136IW203 averages the data stored in the registers 136IW251 to 258, thereby time-averaging the data output from the x-axis sensor. In this characteristic portion 136IW, by time-averaging data in this way, the detection of instantaneous magnetic field changes is eliminated.

The reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 shown in FIG. 9-5 calculates a reference value when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since power supply to the magnetic detector was started. Specifically, reference magnetic field setting section 136IW204 sequentially shifts and transfers data output from first averaging section 136IW203 to registers 136IW261 to 268 (not shown) of reference magnetic field setting section 136IW204 and stores the data. Since the first averaging unit 136IW203 outputs data every 2 ms, the data is stored in all the registers 136IW261 to 268 after 14 ms. A second averaging unit 136IW273 (not shown) of the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 averages the data stored in the registers 136IW261 to 268 and outputs the result as a reference value.

The subtraction unit 136IW205 shown in FIG. 9-5 subtracts the reference value output by the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 from the current value output by the first averaging unit 136IW203, and calculates the absolute value of the reference value as the magnetic field for each axis. Calculated as the amount of change. The calculated amount of change in the magnetic field for each axis is output to the combined vector calculator 136IW233. Therefore, the magnetic field change amount (the absolute value of the magnetic field change with respect to the reference value) is input to the combined vector calculator 136IW233. The control unit 136IW122 also performs the same processing as the output of the x-axis sensor on the outputs of the y-axis sensor and the z-axis sensor. Therefore, the magnetic field change amounts regarding the three axes (x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis) are input to the combined vector calculation unit 136IW233.

The combined vector calculation unit 136IW233 calculates combined magnetic field change amounts for the sets of the x-axis and y-axis, the y-axis and z-axis, and the z-axis and x-axis from the three input values of the magnetic field change amount. For example, the combined magnetic field change amount of the x-axis and y-axis pair is calculated as the square root of the sum of the square of the x-axis magnetic field change amount and the square of the y-axis magnetic field change amount. That is, it becomes the synthetic magnetic field change amount in the xy plane. Similar calculations are performed for the other two pairs (y-axis and z-axis, z-axis and x-axis) to calculate synthetic magnetic field change amounts in the yz plane and zx plane, respectively. The calculated synthetic magnetic field change amount for each plane (xy plane, yz plane, zx plane) is output to the magnetic field detection unit 136IW234.

The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 detects the presence or absence of an illegal magnetic field generated by illegal operation with a magnet from the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 (side of the glass door frame 2). When an illegal magnetic field is detected, the magnetic field detection section 136IW234 outputs an error signal to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 . In this characteristic portion 136IW, the magnetic field detection portion 136IW234 realizes an effective surface setting function. The effective plane setting function is a function for setting an effective plane having two axes as effective detection directions among three axes of magnetic detection directions output by the magnetic detection element 136IW110. In this characteristic portion 136IW, one of the two planes of the xy plane and the zx plane is set as an effective plane according to the mounting mode of the magnetic detector.

With the start of power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply voltage is started to be applied to the setting board 136IW300, and the magnetic detector CLRT signal is output from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Then, the setting board 136IW300 supplies the power supply voltage to the terminal (12 V) of the first magnetic detector 136IW100, and outputs a predetermined selection signal Sa generated based on the power supply voltage to the terminal of the first magnetic detector 136IW100. (SELECT). The control circuit 136IW120 of the first magnetic detector 136IW100 sets an effective plane having biaxial effective detection directions based on this selection signal Sa. The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 uses one synthetic magnetic field change amount corresponding to the effective plane among the three synthetic magnetic field change amounts output from the synthetic vector calculation unit 136IW233 for determination.

In this characteristic portion 136IW, the control circuit 136IW120 sets an effective plane having biaxial effective detection directions according to the input selection signal Sa. When the selection signal Sa indicates Hi (for example, power supply voltage), the x-axis and y-axis of the magnetic detector are set as effective detection directions (the xy plane is an effective plane), and the z-axis direction is set as an ineffective axis. When the selection signal Sa indicates Low (for example, 0 [V] GND), the z-axis and x-axis of the magnetic detector are set as effective detection directions (the zx plane is an effective plane), and the y-axis direction is set as an ineffective axis. do.

In this manner, in the present characteristic portion 136IW, an effective plane having biaxial effective detection directions is set by the selection signal Sa generated based on power supply to the setting board 136IW300. The setting of the effective plane is not limited to the form using the setting board 136IW300 like the characteristic part 136IW, but the magnetic detector may be controlled by the main board 11 or the effect control board 12.

The magnetic field detection unit 136IW234 compares the synthetic magnetic field change amount corresponding to the effective plane selected based on the selection signal Sa with the threshold value, and when the synthetic magnetic field change amount exceeds the threshold value, the game control microcomputer 100 has a comparison function that outputs an error signal.

(Change and confirmation of setting value in characteristic part 136IW)
Next, change and confirmation of the set value in the characteristic portion 136IW will be described. In the characteristic part 136IW, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, the main board 11 functions as a setting key 136IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 136IW052 is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with operation units that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 136IW051 and the setting-switching switch 136IW052, is accommodated in the board case together with the main board 11. The setting key 136IW051 and the setting-switching switch 136IW052 are , are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case.

Since the substrate case having the setting key 136IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. , and can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 136IW051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 136IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF. In this characteristic portion 136IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

(Game control main processing in characteristic portion 136IW)
9-6 and 9-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 136IW. In this characteristic portion 136IW, the processing of steps IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

After initial setting, the CPU 103 turns off the output of the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 (that is, does not output the magnetic detector CTRL signal) (step S136IWS002a).

By executing the process of step S136IWS002a, the characteristic part 136IW does not immediately output the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 even when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started. That is, even if power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, power supply to the magnetic detector is immediately started, and the reference value is not set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204.

Next, the CPU 103 sets an effect control means activation wait timer for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. (Step 136IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 136IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 136IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, it returns to step 136IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 136IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 136IWS006.

Next, the CPU 103 stores, for example, a factory-shipped setting flag indicating that the factory-shipped settings remain in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). (cleared when setting change processing described later) is turned on, and in step 136 IWS006, it is determined whether or not this factory shipment setting flag is turned on. You should check it. In addition, not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value (for example, "0" or "-") indicating that the setting value is set at the time of shipment from the factory is set, and the value of the setting value is set at step 136IWS006. It may be confirmed whether or not is the value at the time of shipment from the factory. If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 136IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 136IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs it up in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is saved (step 136IWS007). Specifically, at step 136IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 136IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 136IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 136IWS008). At step 136IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped, for example, by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 136IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 136IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 136IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is turned on ( Step 136 IWS009). If the setting change flag is ON (step 136IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 136IWS010. .

At step 136IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 136IWS010).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is ON (step 136IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is open), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS012). If the setting key 136IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 136IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 136IWS014). In RAM clear 1 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared, and performance display such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared. information is retained without being cleared. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the set values stored in the RAM 102 are also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is off (that is, when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state; N at step 136IWS011), when the setting key 136IW051 is off (N at step 136IWS012) ), if the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 136IWS013), the process does not proceed to step 136IWS014, but proceeds to loop processing.

By executing the processing of steps 136IWS006 to S014, in this characteristic part 136IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 136IWS007, N of S008) or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 136IWS006 Y), if power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 136IWS009 Y), the setting key 136IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the game machine frame 3 is open. On this condition, the RAM is cleared and the setting values after step 136IWS027 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the setting key 136IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not ON (step 136IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step 136IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is ON (step 136IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 136IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 136IW051 is ON (step 136IWS017). If the setting key 136IW051 is ON, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS018).

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation process start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner). In this case, it may be configured such that when an operation button for presentation such as the push button 31B is pressed on the side of the presentation control board 12, a message such as "maintenance mode" is displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. "Maintenance mode" includes, for example, real-time clock date and time settings, various error history (a record of when and what errors occurred), and setting change history (when the set value was changed and after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of set values. When the setting key 136IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation processing (step 136IWS019). In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 identifies the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and displays the identified setting values on the display monitor. Then, while the gaming machine frame 3 is open and the setting key 136IW051 is on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor. If the setting key 136IW051 is not ON and the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

After completing the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 136IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034a.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is not ON (N at step 136IWS016) or if the setting key 136IW051 is not ON (N at step 136IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. Then, a recovery process (step 136IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). In addition, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control board 12 an effect control command instructing restoration from the power failure by the same processing as in step S7 (step 136IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 136IWS024). In RAM clear 2 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base, and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as role ratios and bases, and set value information are retained without being cleared.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is ON (step 136IWS025). If the output signal from door open sensor 136IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 136IW051 is on (step 136IWS026). If the setting key 136IW051 is on, the CPU 103 turns on the setting changing flag (step 136IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command for starting the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS028). On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change process start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting change processing (step 136IWS029). In the setting change process, the CPU 103 identifies the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and displays the identified setting values on the display monitor. Next, if the output signal from the setting switch 136IW052 is ON, the CPU 103 updates and displays the set values displayed on the display monitor. Also, the setting value (the setting value after updating) displayed on the display monitor is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (the setting value already stored is updated and stored). Then, if the setting key 136IW051 is not ON and the output signal from the door opening sensor 136IW090 is not ON (that is, if the game machine frame 3 is closed), the setting change process is terminated.

After completing the setting change process, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag to turn it off (step 136IWS030). Also, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS031). Also, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 136IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034a.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 136IW090 is not ON (N at step 136IWS025) or if the setting key 136IW051 is not ON (N at step 136IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. By, the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S136IWS033). Then, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

In step S136IW034a, 1 is subtracted from the value of the waiting period timer in which a predetermined waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the waiting period timer after the subtraction is 0. If the value of the waiting period timer is not 0, the process of step S136IW034a is repeatedly executed. If the value of the waiting period timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 136IWS034b.

At step S136IW034b, the CPU 103 turns on the output of the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 (that is, outputs the magnetic detector CTRL signal) (step S136IWS034b). After that, steps IWS035 to S037 are processed, which are the same as steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

In this characteristic part 136IW, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 can be output. , when the gaming machine frame 3 is open (or when setting confirmation processing or setting change processing is being performed), at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or setting confirmation processing or setting change processing The magnetic detector CTRL signal to the setting board 136IW300 is not output until the processing is completed. That is, at least until the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (or until the setting confirmation process or setting change process is completed), the power supply to the magnetic detector is started, and the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204 determines the illegal magnetic field. No reference value is set for With such a configuration, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, in a state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (or in a state in which setting confirmation processing or setting change processing is being performed), It is possible to prevent the setting of a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field, that is, the setting of an inappropriate reference value.

In addition, by executing the process of step S136IWS034a, in this characteristic part 136IW, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game machine frame 3 is opened (or the setting confirmation process or when the setting change process is being performed), after the game machine frame 3 is closed (or after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed), the setting board 136IW300 The magnetic detector CTRL signal for is never output. That is, after the game machine frame 3 is closed (or after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed), the power supply to the magnetic detector is started and the reference magnetic field is set until a predetermined standby period elapses. A reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field is not set in the unit 136IW204. With such a configuration, even if the opened game machine frame 3 is closed, but it is in a state such as a half-open state, even if an operation is performed to open it again and then close it, it will not be possible to completely close it. Since a sufficient period of time is secured as the waiting period and the reference value is set after the waiting period has passed, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate reference value from being set.

Note that this characteristic portion 136IW is configured so that it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 3 in order to change or confirm the setting value, but the setting can be made without opening the gaming machine frame 3. Even when the configuration is such that the value can be changed or confirmed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output to the setting board 136IW300 until a predetermined waiting period elapses after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is opened or closed after changing or confirming the set value, a sufficient period is secured as a standby period until it is closed, and an inappropriate reference value is set. can be prevented.

FIG. 9-8 shows a time chart showing the relationship between detection of magnetic changes by the magnetic detector and various signals. This time chart shows how the x-axis magnetic field changes detected by the magnetic detector. The magnetic change detected by the magnetic detector also changes with respect to the y-axis and z-axis, but illustration thereof is omitted here.

FIG. 9-8 (A) shows a time chart showing the relationship between detection of magnetic changes by a magnetic detector with a general configuration and various signals, and FIG. 9-8 (B) shows this characteristic A time chart showing the relationship between detection of magnetic change by the magnetic detector configured by the unit 136IW and various signals is shown.

Here, the general configuration is a configuration in which power supply to the magnetic detector is started when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field is set. The configuration of this characteristic portion 136IW means that when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is being performed (or the gaming machine frame 3 is opened). case), the reference value for determining the illegal magnetic field is not set until a predetermined waiting period elapses after the setting confirmation process or the setting change process is completed (or after the gaming machine frame 3 is closed). Configuration.

In the example of the general configuration shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), at the time (t1) when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the power supply to the magnetic detector is started, and the selection signal Sa is entered. Then, in the magnetic detector, a reference value is set for judging the illegal magnetic field. At this time, if the gaming machine frame 3 is open for changing or confirming the set values, canceling an error, operating the game again, etc., the gaming machine frame 3 will be closed after the reference value is set. Become. Here, when a change in the state of the gaming machine frame 3 (specifically, a change from the open state to the closed state) causes a change in the magnetic field around the magnetic detector, as shown in FIG. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (t2), the detected value of the x-axis magnetism detected by the magnetic detector changes greatly, and when the synthetic magnetic field change amount exceeds the threshold (t3), magnetic detection An error signal is output from the device.

As shown in FIG. 9-8(A), in a general configuration, a change in the magnetic field around the magnetic detector caused by a change in the state of the gaming machine frame 3 is erroneously detected as fraudulent magnetism, making the player uncomfortable. In addition, there is a risk of increasing the management burden on the administrator. In the case shown in FIG. 9-8(A), the reference value is not set appropriately. There is also a risk of erroneously detecting non-magnetism as fraudulent magnetism. Conversely, there is also a possibility that the fraudulent magnetism that is originally intended to be detected cannot be detected.

On the other hand, in the example of the configuration of this characteristic portion 136IW shown in FIG. When the game machine frame 3 is opened for a restart operation or the like, the magnetic detector CLRT signal is not output from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Therefore, the power supply to the magnetic detector is not started, and the reference value for determining the illegal magnetic field is not set. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (T2), after a predetermined waiting period (T2 to T3) has passed, the main board 11 (game control micro A magnetic detector CLRT signal is output from the computer 100) to the setting board 136IW300. Then, power supply to the magnetic detector is started, and the selection signal Sa is input. Then, in the magnetic detector, a reference value is set for judging the illegal magnetic field. In this case, since the state of the gaming machine frame 3 does not change after setting the reference value, erroneous detection can be suppressed.

As described above, the characteristic portion 136IW includes the following first invention. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation and capable of executing control in an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that it is possible to perform operations such as changing setting values while the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine is open. On the other hand, for example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-279247, a change in impedance due to a magnetic field externally applied to amorphous wires arranged along three axes orthogonal to each other is detected, and detection based on the amount of each change is performed. A configuration for detecting whether or not a magnet exists in the vicinity of the game machine using a magnetic sensor configured to output a voltage is described, and such a configuration is disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Application to game machines is conceivable. However, when applied simply, the opening and closing of the front frame (that is, the change in the state of the front frame) in order to perform operations such as changing the setting value affects the detection value (for example, the reference value) of the magnetic sensor. , false positives may occur. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" ~ setting value "3") can be set to one of the setting means (for example, the part that executes step 136IWS029 in the game control microcomputer 100) and,
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
A reference value (for example, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204) can be set when the power is turned on, and an illegal magnetic field change is detected based on the reference value. a magnetic detector (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101);
Based on the detection of illegal magnetic field change by the magnetic detector, reporting means for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, in the main side error processing of step S22, the first magnetic When the error signal from the detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is in a state (for example, high level) corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection), an error signal is used to notify that an abnormality has been detected. execute anomaly notification processing),
If the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until at least the change of the setting value is completed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is set when the setting change process is If it has been executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output until at least the setting change process is completed (see FIG. 9-7), and the setting board 136IW300 continues to output the magnetic detector CTRL signal. Power supply to the magnetic detector is not started, and the reference value is not set until power supply to the magnetic detector is started (see Figure 9-2))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and suitably notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
If the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until a predetermined period elapses after the setting value is changed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, When the setting change process is being executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal may not be output until a predetermined waiting period elapses after the setting change process (see FIG. 9-7)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an illegal change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
Power supply control means (for example, setting board 136IW300) for controlling power supply to the magnetic detector,
The power control means does not supply power to the magnetic detector when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 performs setting change processing is being executed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 9-7), and the setting board 136IW300 starts supplying power to the magnetic detector until the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output. (see FIG. 9-2)), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an illegal change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the first invention,
A plurality of magnetic detectors (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101),
The power control means supplies power to the plurality of magnetic detectors based on one signal (for example, when the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output, the setting board 136IW300 controls the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW100). 2 start supplying power to the magnetic detector 136IW101 (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). In addition, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, the characteristic portion 136IW includes a second invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation and capable of executing control in an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that it is possible to perform operations such as changing setting values while the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine is open. On the other hand, for example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-279247, a change in impedance due to a magnetic field externally applied to amorphous wires arranged along three axes orthogonal to each other is detected, and detection based on the amount of each change is performed. A configuration for detecting whether or not a magnet exists in the vicinity of the game machine using a magnetic sensor configured to output a voltage is described, and such a configuration is disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Application to game machines is conceivable. However, when applied simply, the opening and closing of the front frame (that is, the change in the state of the front frame) in order to perform operations such as changing the setting value affects the detection value (for example, the reference value) of the magnetic sensor. , false positives may occur. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" ~ setting value "3") can be set to one of the setting means (for example, the part that executes step 136IWS029 in the game control microcomputer 100) and,
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
A reference value (for example, a reference value for determining an illegal magnetic field set in the reference magnetic field setting unit 136IW204) can be set when the power is turned on, and an illegal magnetic field change is detected based on the reference value. a magnetic detector (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101);
Based on the detection of illegal magnetic field change by the magnetic detector, reporting means for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, in the main side error processing of step S22, the first magnetic When the error signal from the detector 136IW100 or the second magnetic detector 136IW101 is in a state (for example, high level) corresponding to magnetic field detection (magnet detection), an error signal is used to notify that an abnormality has been detected. anomaly notification processing), and
an openable and closable opening and closing body (for example, a game machine frame 3),
If the opening/closing body is opened when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until at least the opening/closing body is closed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may is open, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output until at least the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (see FIG. 9-7). Power supply to the magnetic detector is not started until output, and the reference value is not set until power supply to the magnetic detector is started (see Figure 9-2))

According to this feature, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and suitably notify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
If the opening/closing body is opened when the power is turned on, the reference value is not set until a predetermined period elapses after the opening/closing body is closed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may When the frame 3 is open, after the game machine frame 3 is closed, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output until a predetermined waiting period has passed (see FIG. 9-7)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably detect an illegal change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
Power supply control means (for example, setting board 136IW300) for controlling power supply to the magnetic detector,
The power control means does not supply power to the magnetic detector when the opening/closing body is opened when the power is turned on (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game machine frame 3 is open, the magnetic detector CTRL signal is not output (see FIG. 9-7), and the setting board 136IW300 starts supplying power to the magnetic detector until the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output. (see FIG. 9-2)), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably detect an illegal change in the magnetic field.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
A plurality of magnetic detectors (for example, the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW101),
The power control means supplies power to the plurality of magnetic detectors based on one signal (for example, when the magnetic detector CTRL signal is output, the setting board 136IW300 controls the first magnetic detector 136IW100 and the second magnetic detector 136IW100). 2 start supplying power to the magnetic detector 136IW101 (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). In addition, the processing load can be reduced.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by this characterizing portion 136IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions to form a game machine.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 149IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 149IW will be described. First, a pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) constituting a game board surface, and a game board 2. It is composed of a game machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, a glass door frame having a glass window rotates around the left side of the game machine frame 3 between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 3 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 3 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame cannot be opened.

Also, the game board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, a board case including the main board 11 and the like) are configured to be detachable from the game machine frame 3 . Hereinafter, the game board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, a board case including the main board 11, etc.) are referred to as "board side members", and the game machine frame 3 and its peripheral members (for example, the power supply board 149IW17 and the payout control board 149IW18) are referred to as "board side members". It is sometimes called a "frame side member".

Further, in the characteristic portion 149IW, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member.

A setting switching main body provided with an operating portion such as the setting keys 149IW06 that can be operated by the player is mounted on the main substrate 11, and the setting keys 149IW06 can be operated without opening the substrate case. It is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case.

Since the substrate case having the setting keys 149IW06 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. Operation is enabled by opening the game machine frame 3 using the door key. Also, since the setting key 149IW06 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, it can be operated only by the store clerk possessing the setting key. In other words, the set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 149IW06 unless the store clerk or the like of the game arcade opens the game machine frame 3 with the door key. The setting key 149IW06 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF. In this characterizing portion 149IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

In addition, the clear switch 149IW16 in the characterizing part 149IW has a function for executing the initialization process (see FIG. 3), and also a function for changing the set values such as the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) in the setting change state. It also functions as a setting switch. As a result, the number of members can be reduced compared to providing the switch for executing the initialization process and the setting changeover switch for changing the set value with different members, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Here, setting values will be briefly described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 149IW is configured such that the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the set value is changed based on the fact that the door open sensor 149IW15 is on (the door is open), the setting key 149IW06 is on, and the clear switch 149IW16 is on. is controlled to a setting change state in which setting change processing can be executed. In the setting change process, the setting value is switched each time the clear switch 149IW16 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07.

Also, when the power is turned on, the setting for confirming the set value is based on the fact that the door open sensor 149IW15 is on (the door is open), the setting key 149IW06 is on, and the clear switch 149IW16 is off. It is controlled to a setting confirmation state in which confirmation processing can be executed. In the setting confirmation process, the current setting values are displayed on the display monitor 149IW07 without switching the setting values.

Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 100 performs the control to the setting change state and the setting confirmation state, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 149IW includes, in addition to the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device in which a predetermined variable probability area is provided inside. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the variable probability area, the variable probability is determined, and is controlled to the variable probability state after the big hit game is completed.

FIG. 10-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 149IW.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the main board 11 includes a magnetic force sensor 149IW01, a count switch 23, a general winning opening switch 149IW02, a variable area switch 149IW03, a gate switch 21, and solenoids 81, 82, 149IW04 is connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the main substrate 11 is connected with a first starter switch 22A and a second starter switch 22B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the main board 11 has a first out confirmation switch 149IW10, a second out confirmation switch 149IW11, and a first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 via the relay boards 149IW08 and 149IW09 and the payout control board 149IW18. and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 are connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the main board 11 is connected to a touch sensor 149IW14 and a door opening sensor 149IW15 via a relay board 149IW08 and a payout control board 149IW18.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, a clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the main board 11 via a relay board 149IW08 and a power supply board 149IW17.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a setting key 149IW06 and a display monitor 149IW07.

The magnetic force sensor 149IW01 is a detection means for detecting unauthorized operation using a magnet outside the pachinko game machine 1, and sends a magnetic sensor signal indicating the detection state of the external magnetic field due to unauthorized operation to the game control microcomputer 100. Output. The game control microcomputer 100, when a magnetic sensor signal indicating that an external magnetic field has been detected due to illegal operation is input, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the hall management computer and the communication unit that can communicate Abnormality notification processing is executed for notifying an administrator such as a hall staff that there is an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

The count switch 23 is detecting means for detecting the winning of a game ball into the big winning hole, and sends a big winning hole winning signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to the big winning hole to the game control microcomputer 100. Output. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives a large winning hole winning signal indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of games are played to the payout control board 149IW18. A signal indicating that the ball is to be paid out as a prize ball is transmitted. The payout control board 149IW18 that has received the signal performs control to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls as prize balls, and outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. Send to microcomputer 100 .

The general winning slot switch 149IW02 is detection means for detecting the winning of a game ball into the general winning slot 10, and indicates to the game control microcomputer 100 the winning state of the game ball into the general winning slot 10. Output a win-win signal. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the general winning hole winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball to the general winning hole 10 is detected, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the payout control board 149IW18. A signal indicating that game balls are to be paid out as prize balls is transmitted. The payout control board 149IW18 that has received the signal performs control to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls as prize balls, and outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. Send to microcomputer 100 .

The probability variable area switch 149IW03 is a detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the probability variable area, and outputs a probability variable area winning signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to the probability variable area to the game control microcomputer 100. . The game control microcomputer 100 controls to the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends when the variable probability region winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball to the variable probability region is detected is input.

The gate switch 21 is detecting means for detecting passage of a game ball through the passage gate 41, and outputs a gate passage signal indicating the passage state of the game ball through the passage gate 41 to the game control microcomputer 100. . When the game control microcomputer 100 receives a gate passage signal indicating that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, it performs control for storing the normal pattern pending memory.

The solenoid 81 is a drive member for changing the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) between a closed state and an open state. The game control microcomputer 100 changes the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state when allowing the winning of game balls to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). A solenoid drive signal is output to the solenoid 81 for this purpose.

The solenoid 82 is a driving member for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 between a closed state and an open state. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state when allowing the winning of game balls to the special variable winning ball device 7 .

Solenoid 149IW04 is a driving member for changing a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined variable probability area inside between a closed state and an open state. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 149IW04 for changing the special variable winning ball device to the open state when allowing the winning of the game ball to the variable probability area.

The first starting opening switch 22A is a detecting means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and the game to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening). A first starting opening winning signal indicating the winning state of the ball is output to the game control microcomputer 100 . The game control microcomputer 100 stores the first pending memory when the first starting opening winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening) is detected is input. In addition, a signal indicating that a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are to be paid out as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 149IW18. The payout control board 149IW18 that has received the signal performs control to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls as prize balls, and outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. Send to microcomputer 100 .

The second starting opening switch 22B is a detection means for detecting the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). A first start winning signal indicating the winning state of the game ball is output to the game control microcomputer 100. The game control microcomputer 100 stores the second pending memory when the second starting opening winning signal indicating that the winning of the game ball to the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is detected is input. In addition, a signal indicating that a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are to be paid out as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 149IW18. The payout control board 149IW18 that has received the signal performs control to pay out a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls as prize balls, and outputs a prize ball control signal indicating that the prize balls have been normally paid out for game control. Send to microcomputer 100 .

The first out confirmation switch 149IW10 is detecting means for detecting entry (ejection) of a game ball into the out port, and outputs a first out confirmation signal indicating the entry state of the game ball into the out port. Output to the control microcomputer 100 . In addition, the second out confirmation switch 149IW11 is a detecting means for detecting entry of a game ball into the out port, and controls a second out confirmation signal indicating the entry state of the game ball into the out port. output to the microcomputer 100 for use. The first OUT confirmation switch 149IW10 is provided upstream of the second OUT confirmation switch 149IW11. In other words, when the game ball is normally discharged from the out port, the discharge of the game ball is first detected by the first out confirmation switch 149IW10, and then the discharge of the game ball is detected by the second out confirmation switch 149IW11. It is what is done.

For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives the first out confirmation signal indicating that the game ball has entered the out port, it adds "1" to the count value, and the game ball enters the out port. When receiving the second out confirmation signal indicating that the incoming ball has been detected, the count value is decremented by "1". When the count value exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the game control microcomputer 100 assumes that an error has occurred and uses the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer. Then, an abnormality notification process is executed to notify an administrator such as a hall staff that there is an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 is a detection means for detecting that the winning of the game ball to the winning ball device 6A (first start winning port) is normally performed, and the winning ball device 6A (first 1 starting winning hole) outputs the first winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to the game control microcomputer 100. The first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 is provided downstream of the first starting switch 22A. That is, when a game ball normally enters the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the first starting port switch 22A, and then the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12. Winning of the game ball is detected by.

The second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is a detection means for detecting that the game balls are normally entered into the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the variable winning ball device 6B A second winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to (the second starting winning hole) is output to the game control microcomputer 100 . The second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 is provided downstream of the second starting switch 22B. That is, when a game ball normally enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the second starting port switch 22B, and then the second starting port switch. Winning of the game ball is detected by 22B.

For example, if the game control microcomputer 100 does not match the input first starting opening winning signal and the first winning confirmation signal, or matches the input second starting opening winning signal and second winning confirmation signal If the error cannot be obtained, it is assumed that an error has occurred, and the pachinko machine 1 anomaly notification processing for notifying that there is an abnormality in the

The number of game balls detected by the first out confirmation switch 149IW10 and the second out confirmation switch 149IW11 (the number of game balls entering the out port (out balls)), and the game detected by the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 The number of balls (the number of game balls (first start-up winning balls) that have entered the winning ball device 6A (first start-up winning port)) and the number of game balls detected by the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 (variable winning ball device 6B (The number of game balls (second start winning balls) that have entered the (second start winning hole)) and the sum total is the total number of game balls that have been shot (total number of shot balls). Therefore, based on the total number of shot balls and the number of game balls that have entered each winning hole, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched (so-called base) and the role ratio (variable prize ball device 6B (second start winning opening) or the ratio of the number of winning balls to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls to the other winning openings). The calculation result is displayed on the display monitor 149IW07. In addition, when the calculation result is a value outside the predetermined range, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer are used to manage hall staff and the like. A user may be notified that the calculation result is out of a predetermined range.

In addition, the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 are provided to confirm the winning of the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port) and the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). However, it may also be possible to confirm the winning of other winning openings (large winning opening, general winning opening 10, probability variable area). For example, a downflow passage for game balls that have entered the winning ball device 6A (first start winning port), a downflow passage for game balls that have entered the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port), and a large winning port. A downflow passage for game balls entered into, a downflow passage for game balls entered into the general winning port 10, and a downflow passage for game balls entered into the variable probability region are provided with a first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 or a second winning confirmation switch 149IW13. It may also be configured to merge with the passageway that is closed. In that case, the sum of the number of game balls detected by each detection means (first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, general winning port switch 149IW02, probability variable region switch 149IW03) and the first winning When there is a difference of a predetermined number or more between the sum of the number of game balls detected by the confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, there is a risk of winning due to cheating using a ball with string or the like. Therefore, an abnormality that notifies an administrator such as a hall staff that there is an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by using the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and a communication unit that can communicate with the hall management computer. A notification process may be executed. Here, the "predetermined number" is, for example, the maximum detection difference assumed when game balls are clogged in the passage between each detection means and the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12 and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13. .

The touch sensor 149IW14 is a detection means for detecting that the player is in contact with the ball-hitting operation handle 30, and outputs a touch signal indicating the player's contact state with the ball-hitting operation handle 30 to the payout control board 149IW18. to the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control board 149IW18 performs control to permit shooting of game balls when a touch signal indicating detection of the player's contact with the hitting ball operation handle 30 is input. In other words, even if the ball-hitting handle 30 is rotated while the touch signal indicating the detection of the player's contact with the ball-hitting handle 30 is not input, the game ball is not shot, and the ball-hitting handle 30 is not fired. A game ball is shot when the ball hitting operation handle 30 is rotated while a touch signal indicating that the player's contact with the handle 30 has been detected is input.

The door open sensor 149IW15 is detection means for detecting the state (open state or closed state) of the game machine frame 3, and is an open/close state signal indicating the state (open state or closed state) of the game machine frame 3. is output to the game control microcomputer 100.

The clear switch 149IW16 is a detection means for executing initialization, and is a setting changeover switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) in the setting change state. A clear switch signal indicating (pressed or not pressed) is output to the game control microcomputer 100 .

Although the clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the main board 11 via the power supply board 149IW17 in the characteristic portion 149IW, it may be mounted on the power supply board 149IW17 or the relay board 149IW08, or the main board. 11 may be installed.

The setting key 149IW06 is detection means for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and outputs a setting key signal indicating an operation state (ON or OFF) to the game control microcomputer 100 .

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game control microcomputer 100 generates an open/closed state signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state and a clear switch signal indicating that the clear switch 149IW16 is pressed. , and a setting key signal indicating that the setting key 149IW06 is ON, control is made to the setting change state. When the power is turned on, the game control microcomputer 100 receives an open/closed state signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 3 is open and a setting key signal indicating that the setting key 149IW06 is ON. However, when the clear switch signal indicating that the clear switch 149IW16 is pressed is not input, the setting confirmation state is set.

The display monitor 149IW07 is a display device for displaying the current set values. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a display control signal for displaying the current set value to the display monitor 149IW07 in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state.

In addition, a setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main substrate 11, a magnetic force sensor 149IW01, a count switch 23, a general winning opening switch 149IW02, a probability variable area switch 149IW03, a gate switch 21, a first start switch 22A and a second start switch. 22B is provided on the back side of the game board 2, that is, these detection means are provided on board-side members.

On the other hand, the clear switch 149IW16 is connected to the power supply board 149IW17, the touch sensor 149IW14 and the door opening sensor 149IW15 are connected to the payout control board 149IW18, and the first out confirmation switch 149IW10 and the second The 2-out confirmation switch 149IW11, the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, and the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13 are provided on the gaming machine frame 3, that is, these detecting means are provided on the frame side member.

Each detecting means is provided on the board-side member or the frame-side member, respectively, but the member provided with each detecting means is not limited to that shown in the characteristic portion 149IW. For example, in the characteristic portion 149IW, some or all of the plurality of detection means described as being provided in the board-side member may be provided in the frame-side member, or conversely, the feature In the section 149IW, some or all of the plurality of detecting means described as being provided on the frame-side member may be provided on the board-side member.

FIG. 10-2 is a block diagram showing an example of connection between each detecting means and the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 149IW.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, detection signals from the magnetic force sensor 149IW01, the count switch 23, the general winning opening switch 149IW02, and the probability variable area switch 149IW03 are input to the input port 149IW20.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, first out confirmation switch 149IW10, second out confirmation switch 149IW11, first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, touch sensor 149IW14, door open sensor 149IW15, clear switch 149IW16 and A detection signal from the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 149IW21.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the power supply confirmation signal, and the prize ball control signal from the payout control board 149IW18 are input. Input to port 149IW22.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, solenoid drive signals for solenoids 81, 82 and 149IW04 are output from output port 149IW23.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the display control signal to display monitor 149IW07 is output from input port 149IW24.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main substrate 11. The main substrate 11 includes a signal transmission path from the setting key 149IW06, a first OUT confirmation switch 149IW10, and a second OUT confirmation switch 149IW11. , the first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, the second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, the touch sensor 149IW14, the door opening sensor 149IW15, and the transmission path of the detection signal from the clear switch 149IW16. As a result, design changes of the substrate and routing of wiring are reduced, and security can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10B, the setting key 149IW06 and the display monitor 149IW07 are mounted on the main substrate 11 as electronic components, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting keys 149IW06 and the display monitor 149IW07 may be mounted on a specific board different from the main board 11, and the main board 11 and the specific board may be accommodated in the same board case.

Hereinafter, the input port 149IW20 may be referred to as "input port 0", the input port 149IW21 as "input port 1", and the input port 149IW22 as "input port 2".

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of input ports in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. When providing a plurality of input ports to which signals from a plurality of detection means are input, it is conceivable to classify the input ports for each member (frame-side member, board-side member) provided with the detection means. Therefore, first, regarding the first example (an example that does not correspond to the block diagram shown in FIG. 10-2) in which the input ports are classified for each member (frame-side member, board-side member) provided with the detection means, Description will be made with reference to FIG. 10-3(A).

For example, in the first example, as shown in FIG. When the detection signal from the detection means is input to the input port 1, bits 0, 1, and 5 of the input port 0 receive the detection signals of the setting key 149IW06, the count switch 23, and the general winning opening switch 149IW02, respectively. is entered.

Bits 0 to 7 of the input port 1 are respectively associated with a first output confirmation switch 149IW10, a second output confirmation switch 149IW11, a magnetic force sensor 149IW01, a first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, a second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, and a touch sensor 149IW14. , the door open sensor 149IW15, and the detection signals of the clear switch 149IW16 are inputted.

Bits 0, 1, and 3 of input port 1 receive detection signals from the first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, and gate switch 21, respectively. , respectively, a power supply confirmation signal and a prize ball control signal from the payout control board 149IW18 are input.

In this manner, the detection signals from the detection means provided on the board-side member are input to the input ports 0 and 2, and the detection signals from the detection means provided on the frame-side member are input to the input port 1. In this case, the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 0, while the detection signals of the door opening sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to the input port 1. In that case, the game control microcomputer 100, when determining whether or not to control to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, processing to read the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 from the input port 0, door opening It is necessary to read the detection signals of the sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 from the input port 1, respectively, and the processing load is large.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the input port is classified for each member (frame-side member, board-side member) provided with the detection means, and the setting key 149IW06 is used for inputting the frame-side member. A second example of connection to port 1 (an example corresponding to the block diagram shown in FIG. 10-2) will now be described.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), detection signals from detection means provided mainly on the board-side member are input to input ports 0 and 2, and detection means provided mainly on the frame-side member The detection signal from the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 1, and the detection signal of the setting key 149IW06 is input to the input port 1, thereby detecting the setting key 149IW06, the door opening sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16. A signal is input to input port 1 . In that case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the detection signals of the setting key 149IW06, the door opening sensor 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 when determining whether to control to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. Since the processing can be performed collectively, an increase in the processing load can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 149IW, "mainly" is a concept indicating that it occupies a majority. For example, if there is a group containing three elements, and two or more of the three elements have special properties, then the elements included in the group mainly have special properties. It can be said that there is. Specifically, when it is assumed that "mainly detection signals from detection means provided on the board-side member are input to a specific input port", among the plurality of detection signals input to a specific input port, This indicates that the majority of detection signals are detection signals from the detection means provided on the board-side member.

In addition, the signal from the detecting means provided on the board-side member is mainly input to the input port 0, and the signal from the detecting means provided on the frame-side member is mainly input to the input port 1. there is As a result, an increase in processing load can be suppressed. Specifically, when reading signals input from a plurality of detection means provided on the board-side member/frame-side member, it is possible to collectively read from one input port, thereby suppressing an increase in processing load. be able to. Further, by providing an input port to which the detection signal of the detection means provided mainly on the board side member is input and an input port to which the detection signal of the detection means provided mainly on the frame side member is input respectively. , it is effective to compress (save) the storage capacity because it is sufficient to provide a storage area corresponding to each input port.

Further, as described above, signals from the detection means provided on the board-side member are mainly input to the input ports 0 and 2, and signals from the detection means provided on the frame-side member are mainly input to the input port 1. However, the setting key 149IW06 is configured to be input to the input port 1 provided on the board-side member. As a result, from a game machine configured such that each detection means is connected to an input port corresponding to the position where each detection means is provided (a game machine connected as shown in FIG. 10-3(A)) With a few changes, it can be realized that the signals from the setting key 149IW06, the door opening switch 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 are input to one input port.

Specifically, if the setting key 149IW06 is reconnected to the input port 1 from the gaming machine connected as shown in FIG. Signals from the setting key 149IW06, the door opening switch 149IW15 and the clear switch 149IW16 can be input to one input port with less modification than reconnection.

In addition, the clear switch 149IW16 may be provided on the board side member, and in that case, "a game configured so that each detection means is connected to an input port corresponding to the position where each detection means is provided" As the machine, it is assumed that the game machine is connected such that the signal from the clear switch 149IW16 and the signal from the setting key 149IW06 are input to the input port 0, and the signal from the door opening switch 149IW15 is input to the input port 1. Therefore, reconnecting the door open switch 149IW15 to the input port 1 requires less change than reconnecting the clear switch 149IW16 and the set key 149IW06 to the input port 0 to set the set key 149IW06, the door open switch 149IW15 and It can be realized that the signal from the clear switch 149IW16 is input to one input port.

The clear switch for executing the initialization process and the setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided by different members, in which case the function of each switch is clearly distinguished. Therefore, operability can be improved. In that case, it is assumed that the setting changeover switch is provided on the main board 11, and the signal from the clear switch provided on the frame side member is input to the input port 1, but the signal from the setting changeover switch may be input to any input port.

For example, if signals from the door open sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, the clear switch and the setting changeover switch are input to one input port, the door open sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, the clear only switch and the setting changeover switch are input to one input port. Since the signals from the switches can be read collectively, an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

Further, for example, the signals from the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, and the clear switch are read to determine whether or not to control to the setting change state, and the signal from the setting changeover switch is read in the setting change state. Since the setting value is read to determine whether or not to switch, the timing of reading the signal from the door opening sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06, and the clear switch differs from the timing of reading the signal from the setting changeover switch. Therefore, even if the signal from the setting changeover switch is input to an input port different from the input port to which the signals from the door open sensor 149IW15, the setting key 149IW06 and the clear switch are input, the processing load does not increase. is.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the signal input to input port 0 is mainly "0" (the input becomes low level) to turn off, while "1" (the input becomes high level) to turn on, while the signal input to input port 1 is mainly "1" to turn off, while "0" is turned off. It is a negative logic one that is turned on by becoming. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of illegally turning on each detection means occurs by transmitting an illegal radio wave by a so-called radio-controlled goto, the signal input to the input port 0 and the signal input to the input port 1 can be changed. Both can be prevented from being turned on at the same time.

In addition, it has a board-side wiring connected to the main board 11 from the detection means provided on the game board-side member, and a frame-side wiring connected to the main board 11 from the detection means provided on the frame-side member. However, the wiring on the frame side is longer than the wiring on the board side, and it is considered that it is more susceptible to noise. Therefore, as described above, by making the detection signal transmitted through the frame side wiring (mainly the detection signal input to the input port 1) negative logic, even if noise occurs in the off state, the on state It is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the state.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the logic and state of the prize ball control signal (bit 7 of input port 2) are not described, but this is the prize ball output from the payout control board 149IW18. This is because the control signal has a different signal format from the detection signals from other detection means. The prize ball control signal may be a signal composed of a plurality of bits, and like other detection signals, if it is "0", it indicates that the payout of prize balls is completed, and if it is "1", it indicates that the prize ball has been paid out. It may be a signal indicating that the payout of prize balls has been completed.

10-1 does not show a power supply confirmation signal, this is because a detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal is mounted on the main substrate 11. FIG. Since the detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal is mounted on the main board 11 in this way, the state of the power supply confirmation signal can be monitored in accordance with the control status of the main board 11. Therefore, the power supply voltage is lowered, processing such as backup in the main board 11 can be performed more safely.

Also, a detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal may be mounted on the power supply board 149IW17. , It is good also as transmitting the signal which shows that to other board|substrates (main board|substrate 11, payout control board 149IW18, effect control board 12, etc.). In this case, the number of parts required for power failure processing can be reduced compared to mounting a detection circuit for detecting the power supply confirmation signal on each board, so the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Each board that receives a signal indicating a drop in the power supply voltage from the power supply board 149IW17 may perform a process of backing up various data.

As described above, the characteristic portion 149IW includes the following inventions. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation and capable of executing control in an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that it is possible to perform operations such as changing setting values while the front frame of the pachinko gaming machine is open. On the other hand, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-77349 describes a configuration including control means (for example, a main board) provided with a plurality of input ports. Application to the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Patent No. 200902 is conceivable. However, when simply applied, a member that outputs a predetermined signal is connected to an input port corresponding to the position where the member is provided (for example, if the member is provided in the game frame, the first input port and connect to the second input port if the member is provided on the game board), but there is a risk that the processing load will increase when reading signals input to multiple input ports. be. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
An opening/closing body that can be opened and closed (for example, a frame side member (including the gaming machine frame 3, the power supply board 149IW17, and the payout control board 149IW18));
an opening/closing detection means (for example, a door opening sensor 149IW15) for detecting the state of the opening/closing body;
a first operation detecting means (for example, clear switch 149IW16) capable of detecting the first operation;
a second operation detection means (for example, setting key 149IW06) capable of detecting a second operation;
A control means (eg, main board 11) having a plurality of input ports capable of inputting signals (eg, input port 149IW20 to input port 149IW22 (input port 0 to input port 2));
A detection signal from the opening/closing detection means (for example, a signal from the door opening sensor 149IW15), a detection signal from the first operation detection means (for example, a signal from the clear switch 149IW16), and a detection signal from the second operation detection means. (For example, a signal from the setting key 149IW06) is input to a specific input port (for example, input port 149IW21 (input port 1)) among the plurality of input ports,
The control means is
When the detection signal of the opening/closing detection means, the detection signal of the first operation detection means, and the detection signal of the second operation detection means are in a specific input state, a plurality of set values (for example, a set value "1" ~ set value "3") setting means that can be set to one of the set values (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, when the power is turned on, the door open sensor 149IW15 is turned on (the door is open) a portion for changing the set value based on the fact that the setting key 149IW06 is on and the clear switch 149IW16 is on;
Game control means (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.

According to this feature, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the invention,
The game machine further includes a detachable body (for example, a board side member (including a board case containing the game board 2, the main board 11, etc.)) that can be attached to and detached from the opening and closing body,
Detachable body-side detection means provided in the detachable body to detect the first event (for example, magnetic force sensor 149IW01, count switch 23, general winning opening switch 149IW02, first starter switch 22A, second starter switch 22B, and a gate switch 21);
Opening/closing body detection means provided in the opening/closing body for detecting a second event (for example, first out confirmation switch 149IW10, second out confirmation switch 149IW11, first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, touch sensor 149IW14, door open sensor 149IW15, and clear switch 149IW16),
The control means has a first input port (for example, input ports 149IW20 and 149IW22 (input ports 0 and 2)) into which detection signals of the attachment/detachment side detection means are mainly input, and detection signals of the opening/closing body side detection means are mainly input. It is described that a plurality of input ports (for example, input port 149IW21 (input port 1)) may be provided, including a second input port that is input to the process An increase in burden can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the invention,
The second operation detection means is provided on the detachable body (for example, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11 that is detachable together with the game board 2),
It is described that the detection signal of the second operation detection means may be input to the second input port (for example, the signal from the setting key 149IW06 may be input to the input port 149IW21 (input port 1)). Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the invention,
The control means includes a control board (eg, main board 11),
The second operation detection means is provided on the control board (for example, the setting key 149IW06 is provided on the main board 11),
In the control board, the transmission path of the detection signal of the second operation detection means and the transmission path of the detection signal of the opening/closing body side detection means merge (for example, in the main board 11, the transmission path of the signal from the setting key 149IW06 and , first out confirmation switch 149IW10, second out confirmation switch 149IW11, first winning confirmation switch 149IW12, second winning confirmation switch 149IW13, touch sensor 149IW14, door opening sensor 149IW15 and clear switch 149IW16. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the design change of the substrate and the routing of the wiring, and improve the security.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the invention,
The control means are
Initialization means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, if Y in step S3 (output from clear switch 149IW16 the part that executes step S8 if the signal is on);
In the setting change state, setting value updating means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, clear switch in the setting change process 149IW16 is operated to switch the setting value). According to such a configuration, the number of members of the game machine can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. can do.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the invention,
A third operation detection means (for example, a setting changeover switch) capable of detecting a third operation is provided,
The control means are
Initialization means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, if Y in step S3 (output from clear switch 149IW16 the part that executes step S8 if the signal is on);
In the setting change state, setting value updating means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, setting switching in the setting change process A portion for switching the set value each time the switch is operated), and according to such a configuration, operability can be improved.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by this characterizing portion 149IW can also be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions to form a gaming machine.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 045SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 045SG will be described. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) constituting a game board surface, and a game board 2 supported. It is composed of a game machine frame (underframe) 3 to be fixed. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, a glass door frame having a glass window rotates around the left side of the game machine frame 3 between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 3 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 3 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame cannot be opened.

Also, the game board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, a board case including the main board 11 and the like) are configured to be detachable from the game machine frame 3 . Hereinafter, the game board 2 and its peripheral members (for example, the board case including the main board 11 and the relay board 045SG01) will be referred to as "board side members", and the game machine frame 3 and its peripheral members (for example, shown in FIG. 11-1). The relay board 045SG02, the payout control board 045SG03, the relay board 045SG04, the power board 045SG05) may be called "frame side member".

The configuration of the game area of the game board 2 of the characteristic portion 045SG is the same configuration as the configuration of FIG. A special variable winning ball device is provided in the right side area (right hitting area), which is a specific area of the game board 2, and the game ball enters a predetermined variable probability area provided inside the special variable winning ball device. By doing so, it is controlled to a variable probability state (high probability state).

A solenoid 045SG16 for closing and opening these special variable winning ball devices is provided on the game board 2 in the same manner as the solenoids 81 and 82, and is connected to the solenoid circuit 111 of the main board 11. By controlling the drive of the solenoid 045SG16 by the game control microcomputer 100 mounted in 11, the closed state and the open state of the special variable winning ball device are controlled. In this characteristic part 045SG, the game control microcomputer 100 opens the special variable winning ball device in a specific round game (for example, the final round) in a jackpot game state when a specific type of jackpot is achieved. control.

In this way, since the variable probability area into which the game balls can enter is provided inside the special variable winning ball device, the pachinko machine 1 vibrates when the special variable winning ball device is opened. If added, the course of the game ball entering the special variable winning ball device will change due to the open state, and it will be possible to illegally enter the variable probability area. A vibration sensor 045SG15 for detecting vibration of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided on the game board 2 (FIG. 11-1). Although both "detection" and "detection" are used in the characterizing section 045SG, these "detection" and "detection" have the same meaning.

Also, in the present characteristic portion 045SG, similarly to the characteristic portions 208SG and 149IW described above, the main board 11 is accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member, and the pachinko game can be played. It is mounted on the back of aircraft 1 (see Figure 8-3).

In addition, the clear switch 045SG28 in the characteristic portion 045SG has a function for executing initialization processing (see FIG. 3), as well as the characteristic portion 208SG and 149IW described above, in addition to the probability of winning the jackpot in the setting change state. It also has a function as a setting changeover switch for changing set values such as ball rate). As a result, the number of members can be reduced compared to providing the switch for executing the initialization process and the setting changeover switch for changing the set value with different members, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

FIG. 11-1 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 045SG. 11-1, the relay board 15, the effect control board 12, and various effect devices such as the image display device 5 and the movable body 32 connected to the effect control board 12 in FIG. 2 are omitted. there is

In addition, gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, solenoids 81, 82, first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20 , 1st suspension display 25A, 1st suspension display 25B, normal figure suspension display 25C, game control microcomputer 100, switch circuit 110, and solenoid circuit 111 have already been explained in the basic explanation, so here description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, the game board 2 includes a gate switch 21, a first start switch 22A, a second start switch 22B, a count switch 23, and a game ball that has entered a general prize winning hole. general winning port switch 045SG11 for the above-mentioned variable probability area switch 045SG12 for detecting game balls that have entered the variable probability area inside the special variable winning ball device; magnetic force sensor 045SG13 for detecting unauthorized use of magnets, The first radio wave sensor 045SG14 for detecting illegal radio waves and the vibration sensor 045SG15 for detecting vibration are connected to the relay board 045SG01 via the relay board 045SG01. A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is connected to the board 11 and can grasp the game ball detection status by these various switches and the detection status by each sensor.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the frame side member includes a first out confirmation switch 045SG21, a second out confirmation switch 045SG22, a first winning confirmation switch 045SG23, a second winning confirmation switch 045SG24, and a second radio wave sensor 045SG25. are provided, and these are all connected to the main board 11 via relay boards 045SG02, 045SG04 and payout control board 045SG03, and the detection status of game balls by these various switches and the detection status by each sensor , the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 can be grasped.

The first out confirmation switch 045SG21 is detecting means for detecting entry (ejection) of a game ball into the out port, and outputs a first out confirmation signal indicating the entry state of the game ball into the out port. Output to the control microcomputer 100 . In addition, the second out confirmation switch 045SG22 is detecting means for detecting entry of a game ball into the out port, and controls a second out confirmation signal indicating the entry state of the game ball into the out port. output to the microcomputer 100 for use. The first OUT confirmation switch 045SG21 is provided upstream of the second OUT confirmation switch 045SG22. That is, when the game ball is normally discharged from the out port, the discharge of the game ball is first detected by the first out confirmation switch 045SG21, and then the discharge of the game ball is detected by the second out confirmation switch 045SG22. It is what is done.

For example, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives the first out confirmation signal indicating that the game ball has entered the out port, it adds "1" to the count value, and the game ball enters the out port. When receiving the second out confirmation signal indicating that the incoming ball has been detected, the count value is decremented by "1". When the count value exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the game control microcomputer 100 assumes that an error has occurred and uses the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the communication unit capable of communicating with the hall management computer. Then, an abnormality notification process is executed to notify an administrator such as a hall staff that there is an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

The first winning confirmation switch 045SG23 is a detection means for detecting that the winning of game balls to the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port) is normally performed, and is a winning ball device 6A (first 1 starting winning hole) outputs the first winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to the game control microcomputer 100. The first winning confirmation switch 045SG23 is provided downstream of the first starting switch 22A. That is, when a game ball normally enters the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the first starting port switch 22A, and then the first winning confirmation switch 045SG23. Winning of the game ball is detected by.

The second winning confirmation switch 045SG24 is a detecting means for detecting that the game balls are normally entered into the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and is the variable winning ball device 6B. A second winning confirmation signal indicating the winning state of the game ball to (the second starting winning hole) is output to the game control microcomputer 100 . The second winning confirmation switch 045SG24 is provided downstream of the second starting switch 22B. That is, when a game ball normally enters the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), the winning of the game ball is first detected by the second starting port switch 22B, and then the second starting port switch. Winning of the game ball is detected by 22B.

For example, if the game control microcomputer 100 does not match the input first starting opening winning signal and the first winning confirmation signal, or matches the input second starting opening winning signal and second winning confirmation signal If the error cannot be obtained, it is assumed that an error has occurred, and the pachinko machine 1 anomaly notification processing for notifying that there is an abnormality in the

In addition, in this characteristic portion 045SG, an example in which only the first winning confirmation switch 045SG23 and the second winning confirmation switch 045SG24 are provided has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the count switch 23 is provided. A large winning opening confirmation switch, a general winning opening confirmation switch corresponding to the general winning opening switch 045SG11, a probability changing area confirmation switch corresponding to the probability changing area switch 045SG12, etc. may be provided.

The second radio wave sensor 045SG25 is a sensor for detecting illegal radio waves like the first radio wave sensor 045SG14, but is capable of detecting radio waves in a frequency band different from the frequency band detectable by the first radio wave sensor 045SG14. By using a plurality of sensors with different detectable frequency bands in this way, it is possible to more reliably ascertain illegalities using radio waves (radio waves). Although two radio wave sensors are used in the characteristic part 045SG, the present invention is not limited to this. If a wide sensor is used, only one radio wave sensor may be used.

In addition, the frame side member is also provided with a touch sensor 045SG26 and a door opening sensor 045SG27, each of these sensors is connected to the main board 11 via the payout control board 045SG03 and the relay board 045SG02, detection by each sensor A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 can grasp the situation.

The touch sensor 045SG26 is a detection means for detecting that the player is in contact with the ball-hitting operation handle 30. A touch signal indicating the player's contact state with the ball-hitting operation handle 30 is sent to the payout control board 045SG03. to the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control board 045SG03 performs control to permit shooting of game balls when a touch signal indicating detection of the player's contact with the hitting ball operation handle 30 is input. In other words, even if the ball-hitting handle 30 is rotated while the touch signal indicating the detection of the player's contact with the ball-hitting handle 30 is not input, the game ball is not shot, and the ball-hitting handle 30 is not fired. A game ball is shot when the ball hitting operation handle 30 is rotated while a touch signal indicating that the player's contact with the handle 30 has been detected is input.

The door opening sensor 045SG27 is detecting means for detecting the state (open state or closed state) of the game machine frame 3, and is an open/close state signal indicating the state (open state or closed state) of the game machine frame 3. to output

As shown in FIG. 11-1, the frame side member is provided with a power supply board 045SG05 and a clear switch 045SG28 together with relay boards 045SG02 and 045SG04 and a payout control board 045SG03. It is connected to the main board 11 via the board 045SG02, and the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 can grasp the operation of the clear switch 045SG28.

The clear switch 045SG28 is a detection means for executing initialization, and is a setting changeover switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) in the setting change state. Outputs a clear switch signal indicating (pressed or not pressed).

Next, the connection status of the vibration sensor 045SG15, the first radio wave sensor 045SG14, and the second radio wave sensor 045SG25 will be described with reference to FIG. 11-2.

The vibration sensor 045SG15 and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14, which are both provided on the board-side member, are connected to the input terminals of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30, as shown in FIG. A detection signal can be output to an interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on the substrate 11).

These interface integrated circuits 045SG30 transmit detection signals output from various sensors such as the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 and various switches described later to the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. This is for making a signal of predetermined specifications (voltage, etc.) that can be input, and the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 shown in FIG. 11-2 is mounted on the main substrate 11, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, these interface integrated circuits 045SG30 may be provided on the relay substrate 045SG01 provided on the board-side member or other dedicated substrates.

In the interface integrated circuit 045SG30, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, two paths of a first system circuit 045SG31 and a second system circuit 045SG32 are provided in parallel. An anomaly detection processing circuit 045SG33 is provided for detecting an anomaly related to the signal input to the first system circuit 045SG31 and the second system circuit 045SG32. , an output signal corresponding to the detection signal input to the input side is output, and when an abnormality is detected in the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33, the abnormality detection signal is sent to a dedicated output terminal (abnormal output terminal). It is designed to be output from the terminal E). In this characteristic portion 045SG, the vibration sensor 045SG15 is connected to the input side (input terminal A1) of the first system circuit 045SG31, and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 is connected to the input side (input terminal A2) of the second system circuit 045SG32. It is connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the signal line connecting the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 and the input side (input terminal A2) of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is connected to the second radio wave sensor provided on the frame side member. 045SG25 is also connected, and the detection signal output from the second radio wave sensor 045SG25 is also input to the input terminal A2 of the second system circuit 045SG32, like the detection signal from the first radio wave sensor 045SG14. . In this way, by collectively inputting the signals output from the sensors of the same type, although the members provided are different, to the same terminal of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30, both the board-side member and the frame-side member can be controlled. , the number of interface integrated circuits 045SG30 can be reduced, and the number of signals input to the game control microcomputer 100 can also be reduced.

The signal line connecting the output side of the first system circuit 045SG31 (output terminal Y1) and the output side of the second system circuit 045SG32 (output terminal Y2) and the main board 11 (input port of the game control microcomputer 100) is Both of them are constantly pulled up to a predetermined voltage VCC (5V) via a resistor R of a predetermined value. Therefore, the signals output from the output side (output terminal Y1) of the first system circuit 045SG31 and the output side (output terminal Y2) of the second system circuit 045SG32 are active low signals (negative logic signals). In this way, the active low signal (negative logic signal) is used in radio wave fraud, from a switch that detects a game ball by means of a fraudulent radio wave, for example, a count switch 23 that detects a game ball that has entered a big winning slot. signal is illegally turned ON, so by setting the signal logic of the radio wave sensor to an active low signal (negative logic signal), it is possible to accurately grasp the signal even in the presence of illegal radio waves. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an active high signal (positive logic signal) may be used depending on the sensor or switch used.

Although not shown in FIG. 11-2, each signal line (input side signal line) connecting the vibration sensor 045SG15, the first radio wave sensor 045SG14, the second radio wave sensor 045SG25, and the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is also VCC. It is pulled up to a voltage VDD (12V) different from (5V), and an active low signal (negative logic signal) is input to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the input side of a wired OR connection switch (transistor switch) 045SG40 is connected to the abnormal output terminal E of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30. A detection signal is input, and these abnormality detection signals are not directly input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100 . The wired-OR connection switch 045SG40 (including a B-IF signal wired-OR connection switch 045SG41 and a W-IF signal wired-OR connection switch 045SG42, which will be described later) is mounted with an interface integrated circuit 045SG30 to be connected. However, the arrangement position of these wired-OR connection switches 045SG40 may be appropriately determined.

The output side of the wired OR connection switch 045SG40 is connected to the output side (output terminal Y1) of the first system circuit 045SG31 and the output side (output terminal Y2) of the second system circuit 045SG32, as shown in FIG. and one terminal of the wired OR connection switch 045SG40 is grounded (GND). The wired OR connection switch 045SG40 operates to ground (GND) the output side, thereby connecting to the output side (output terminal Y1) of the first system circuit 045SG31 and the output side (output terminal Y2) of the second system circuit 045SG32. All of the signal lines that are connected are in the Lo state during the period in which the abnormality detection signal is being input.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the abnormal output terminal E are output to the terminal corresponding to the 6th bit of the input port 1 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 A wired OR signal (vibration Wired-OR signal) with an abnormality detection signal is input, and the terminal corresponding to the 7th bit of the input port 1 of the game control microcomputer 100 is connected to the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 or the second radio wave sensor 045SG25. A wired OR signal (radio wave Wired-OR signal) of the detection signal and the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormality output terminal E is input.

Here, the configuration of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 used in the characteristic part 045SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. A2, output terminals Y1 and Y2, and an abnormal output terminal E. As described above, the package IC has a first system circuit 045SG31, a second system circuit 045SG32, and an abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the first system circuit 045SG31 and the second system circuit 045SG32 have the same configuration, and each voltage input from the power supply terminal VS and the power supply terminal VCC is applied to the first system circuit 045SG31. and the second system circuit 045SG32.

A power supply monitoring circuit 045SG34 is provided inside the interface integrated circuit 045SG30. The power supply monitoring circuit 045SG34 is connected to the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 so as to detect any abnormality in the input voltages. The power monitoring circuit 045SG34 notifies the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the power abnormality, and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 outputs an abnormality detection signal from the abnormality output terminal E in response to the notification of the power abnormality. ing.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the first system circuit 045SG31 and the second system circuit 045SG32 include an amplifier 045SG36 connected to the input terminals A1 and A2 and an output signal transistor switch 045SG38 connected to the amplifier 045SG36. are provided, and the output signal transistor switch 045SG38 is turned on in response to the input of the detection signal from the input terminals A1 and A2, and is connected to the ground (GND). An active low signal (negative logic signal) is output. The interface integrated circuit 045SG30 has an amplifier corresponding to the Kutibrow signal (negative logic signal) from the vibration sensor 045SG15, the first radio wave sensor 045SG14, and the second radio wave sensor 045SG25, as will be described later. , There are two types, one having an amplification amplifier corresponding to the active high signal (positive logic signal) output from various switches such as the first start switch that detects the passage of the game ball, but in this characteristic part 045SG, For the sake of convenience, the same reference numerals are used. Of course, an active high signal (positive logic signal) output from various switches may be input to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 as an active low signal (negative logic signal) by the signal inverting circuit 045SG50.

The first system circuit 045SG31 and the second system circuit 045SG32 are provided with a disconnection detection circuit 045SG35 and a short circuit detection circuit 045SG37 connected to the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33. The 045SG37 detects an input abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit of the input signal lines connected to the input terminals A1 and A2, and notifies the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33.

As described above, the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 is notified of a power supply abnormality from the power supply monitoring circuit 045SG34, or when an abnormality is detected from the disconnection detection circuit 045SG35 or the short circuit detection circuit 045SG37 of the first system circuit 045SG31 or the second system circuit 045SG32. When notified, an abnormality detection signal is output from a dedicated abnormality output terminal E.

FIG. 11-4 shows the relationship between the detection states of various sensors and each signal in the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 11-2. In FIG. 11-4, (L) indicates that the signal is in a Low state (low potential state), (H) indicates that the signal is in a High state (low potential state), The first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (the second radio wave sensor 045SG25) indicates that it is "one of the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 and the second radio wave sensor 045SG25".

Specifically, when both the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the radio wave sensor are detection (L), and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is detection (L), the vibration Wired-OR signal and the radio wave Since both of the Wired-OR signals are detected (L), the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

Also, when both the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (second radio wave sensor 045SG25) are in detection (L) and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is in non-detection (H) Since both the vibration Wired-OR signal and the radio wave Wired-OR signal are detected (L), the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

Further, when the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (second radio wave sensor 045SG25) is non-detection (H) and the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 are detection (L), the vibration Wired-OR signal and Since both of the radio wave Wired-OR signals are detected (L), the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

Further, when the vibration sensor 045SG15 is detected (L) and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (second radio wave sensor 045SG25) and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 are not detected (H), the vibration Wired-OR signal is Although it is detection (L), the radio wave Wired-OR signal is non-detection (H), so the game control microcomputer 100 can determine the occurrence of vibration error.

Further, when the vibration sensor 045SG15 is non-detection (H) and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (second radio wave sensor 045SG25) and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 are detection (L), the vibration Wired-OR signal and Since both of the radio wave Wired-OR signals are detected (L), the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

Further, when the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 are non-detecting (H) and only the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (second radio wave sensor 045SG25) is detecting (L), vibration Wired-OR Although the signal is non-detection (H), the radio wave Wired-OR signal is detection (L), so the game control microcomputer 100 can determine the occurrence of radio wave error.

Further, when both the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (the second radio wave sensor 045SG25) are non-detecting (H) and only the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 is detecting (L), the vibration Wired- Since both the OR signal and the radio wave Wired-OR signal are detected (L), the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

Further, when all of the vibration sensor 045SG15, the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (the second radio wave sensor 045SG25), and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 are non-detection (H), the vibration Wired-OR signal and the radio wave Wired-OR signal Since both are non-detection (H), the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that it is in a normal state in which no abnormality has occurred.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 100 detects not only the radio wave error and the vibration error, but also the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 by combining the two signals of the vibration Wired-OR signal and the radio wave Wired-OR signal. Abnormalities related to inputs and power supply abnormalities detected by are also determined to be abnormal. It should be noted that the radio wave error and the vibration error, the probability of both errors occurring at the same time is very low, so if both the vibration Wired-OR signal and the radio wave Wired-OR signal are detected (L), the game control The microcomputer 100 can determine that there is a high possibility that an abnormality has been detected by the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33.

11-5 and 11-6, in addition to the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 (the second radio wave sensor 045SG25), the characteristic part 045SG has various As for the switches, signals are input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 shown in FIG. 11-3. 11-5 and 11-6, pull-up resistors and the like are omitted as appropriate.

Specifically, one interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is provided for each of the six types of switches provided on the board side member for detecting the passage of game balls, and the frame side member is provided with an interface integrated circuit 045SG30. One interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is provided for every two types of switches for four types of switches for detecting the passage of game balls.

Of the six types of switches provided on the board-side member for detecting the passage of game balls, the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B are connected to one interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and integrated into the interface. The first starting signal output from the output terminal Y1 of the circuit 045SG30 and the second starting signal output from the output terminal Y2 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 are connected to the input port 3 of the game control microcomputer 100. It is input to the bit corresponding terminal and the first bit corresponding terminal (FIG. 11-7).

In addition, the gate switch 21 and the general prize winning slot switch 045SG11 are also connected to one interface integrated circuit 045SG30, and the gate signal output from the output terminal Y1 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and the output terminal Y2 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 are output. The general winning hole signal is input to the terminal corresponding to the 5th bit and the terminal corresponding to the 6th bit of the input port 0 of the game control microcomputer 100 (FIG. 11-7).

Also, the count switch 23 and the probability variable region switch 045SG12 are connected to one interface integrated circuit 045SG30, and the count signal output from the output terminal Y1 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and the output terminal Y2 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 are output. A probability variable area signal is input to the terminal corresponding to the first bit and the terminal corresponding to the third bit of the input port 0 of the game control microcomputer 100 (FIG. 11-7).

Between the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and the input port, as shown in FIG. 11-5, a signal inverting circuit 045SG50 is provided for each signal line. Signals, gate signals, general winning hole signals, count signals, probability variable area signals are all converted to active high signals and input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100 (Fig. 11- 7)

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormality output terminal E of the three interface integrated circuits 045SG30 connected to the six types of switches provided on the board-side member is Output to three B-IF signal wired OR connection switches 045SG41 provided corresponding to each of the integrated circuits 045SG30. A B-IF signal, which is an OR signal, is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100 .

That is, any of the three interface integrated circuits 045SG30 connected to the six types of switches provided on the board-side member, for example, the interface integrated to which the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B are connected When an abnormality is detected in the circuit 045SG30 and an abnormality detection signal is output, the B-IF signal is detected (L), so the game control microcomputer 100 detects the B-IF signal (L). As a result, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has been detected in any of the interface integrated circuits 045SG30 to which each switch of the board-side member is connected, and for example, the first start signal and the Based on the detection (H) of all of the second starter signals, the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22A, the second It can be determined that an abnormality has been detected in the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 to which the starting switch 22B is connected.

The B-IF signal wired-OR connection switch 045SG41 is a transistor switch having one terminal grounded (GND), like the wired-OR connection switch 045SG40 described above.

As described above, the characteristic part 045SG generates, as a Wired-OR signal, a B-IF signal that is a Wired-OR signal of anomaly detection signals output from each interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on the board-side member. and input to the game control microcomputer 100, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. A connection switch 045SG40 is provided, and a first start Wired-OR signal and a second start Wired which are Wired-OR signals of the signals output from the output terminals Y1 and Y2 of the interface integrated circuits 045SG30 and the abnormality detection signal. -OR signal, gate Wired-OR signal and general winning hole Wired-OR signal, count Wired-OR signal and probability variable area Wired-OR signal, together with B-IF signal, or for game control instead of B-IF signal It may be input to the microcomputer 100, and in this case, when the state in which both of the Wired-OR signals of each combination are detected (H) continues for a certain period or longer, the game The control microcomputer 100 may determine that the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 corresponding to the combination is abnormal.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-6, among the four types of switches provided on the frame side member,
The first OUT confirmation switch 045SG21 and the second OUT confirmation switch 045SG22 are also connected to one interface integrated circuit 045SG30, and the first OUT signal output from the output terminal Y1 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and the output of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 The second OUT signal output from the terminal Y2 is input to the second bit corresponding terminal and the third bit corresponding terminal of the input port 1 of the game control microcomputer 100 (FIG. 11-7).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, among the four types of switches provided on the frame side member, the first winning confirmation switch 045SG23 and the second winning confirmation switch 045SG24 are also connected to one interface integrated circuit 045SG30. The first winning confirmation signal output from the output terminal Y1 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and the second winning confirmation signal output from the output terminal Y2 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 are input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100. 1 is input to the terminal corresponding to the 0th bit and the terminal corresponding to the 1st bit (FIG. 11-7).

As shown in FIG. 11-6, between the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and the input port, a signal inverting circuit 045SG50 is provided for each signal line. Both the first winning confirmation signal and the second winning confirmation signal are converted into active high signals and input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100 (see FIG. 11-7).

Further, the abnormality detection signals output from the abnormality output terminals E of the two interface integrated circuits 045SG30 connected to the four types of switches provided on these frame-side members correspond to each of the two interface integrated circuits 045SG30. B-IF which is a Wired-OR signal of the two W-IF signal wired OR connection switches 045SG42. A signal is input to the terminal corresponding to the 7th bit of the input port 0 of the game control microcomputer 100 (FIG. 11-7).

That is, one of the two interface integrated circuits 045SG30 connected to the four types of switches provided on the frame side member, for example, the interface integrated circuit to which the first out confirmation switch 045SG21 and the second out confirmation switch 045SG22 are connected. When an abnormality is detected in the circuit 045SG30 and an abnormality detection signal is output, the W-IF signal is detected (L), so the game control microcomputer 100 detects the W-IF signal (L). As a result, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has been detected in any one of the interface integrated circuits 045SG30 to which each switch of the frame side member is connected. Based on the detection (H) of both of the second winning confirmation signals, out of the two interface integrated circuits 045SG30 to which each switch of the frame side member is connected, the first out confirmation switch 045SG21 It can be determined that an abnormality has been detected in the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 to which the OUT confirmation switch 045SG22 is connected.

The W-IF signal wired-OR connection switch 045SG42 is a transistor switch having one terminal grounded (GND), like the wired-OR connection switch 045SG40 described above.

As described above, the characteristic part 045SG generates, as a Wired-OR signal, a W-IF signal that is a Wired-OR signal of anomaly detection signals output from each interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided in the frame side member. and input to the game control microcomputer 100, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the case shown in FIGS. A wired-OR connection switch 045SG40 is provided for each 045SG30, and a first OUT Wired-OR signal, which is a Wired-OR signal of signals output from the output terminals Y1 and Y2 of each interface integrated circuit 045SG30 and an abnormality detection signal, and a second out Wired-OR signal are provided. The 2-out Wired-OR signal, the first winning confirmation Wired-OR signal and the second winning confirmation Wired-OR signal are input to the game control microcomputer 100 together with the W-IF signal or in place of the W-IF signal. In this case, when the state in which both of the Wired-OR signals of these combinations are detected (H) continues for a certain period of time or more, the game control microcomputer 100 , it may be determined that the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 corresponding to the combination is abnormal.

The interface integrated circuit 045SG30, the wired OR connection switch 045SG40, and the W-IF signal wired OR connection switch 045SG42 shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be provided on the payout control board 045SG03 or the relay board 045SG02.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an input port of the game control microcomputer 100 of the characteristic part 045SG. The characteristic part 045SG is provided with four input ports 0 to 3 each having eight terminals assigned to the 0th to 7th bits.

Among these input ports, input ports 0 and 3 are used as ports for mainly inputting signals related to board-side members, while input ports 1 and 2 are mainly used for signals related to frame-side members. is assumed to be the input port. In particular, the input port 2 receives detection signals from the setting key (not shown) provided on the main substrate 11, the door opening sensor 045SG27, and the clear switch 045SG28, similarly to the characteristic portion 149IW described above. Game control microcomputer 100, when determining whether to control to the setting change state or setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, collectively read the detection signals of the setting key, the door opening sensor 045SG27 and the clear switch 045SG28. Therefore, an increase in processing load can be prevented.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 045SG, since the W-IF signal is also input to these input ports 2, when determining whether to control to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described above, the frame side member Whether or not there is an abnormality in the power supply of the provided interface integrated circuit 045SG30, etc., can be confirmed from the W-IF signal. Since the reading process can be performed collectively, it is possible to prevent a further increase in the processing load.

Next, the flow of processing related to abnormality (error) based on the W-IF signal will be described with reference to FIG. 11-8. FIG. 11-8 is a flow chart showing game control main processing in the characterizing portion 045SG.

The game control main process in the characteristic part 045SG is basically the same as the game control main process shown in FIG. W-IF signal determination processing is executed to determine the presence or absence of an abnormality (error) based on the W-IF signal before the W-IF signal becomes possible.

In other words, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the W-IF signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS01) after executing the processing of S7 or S9 in the basic explanation described above.

Then, when the W-IF signal is not in the detection (L) state (045SGS01; N), that is, when no abnormality is detected in any of the interface integrated circuits 045SG30 provided on the frame-side member, While proceeding to S10, when the W-IF signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS01; Y), that is, when an abnormality is detected in any of the interface integrated circuits 045SG30 provided on the frame side member After sending an error designation command for notifying the frame side interface (IF) error to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (045SGS02), the process proceeds to S10. Therefore, when the game control microcomputer 100 determines that a frame-side interface (IF) error has occurred, the game can be executed, and the game does not enter the prohibited state.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-8, any of the two interface integrated circuits 045SG30 provided on the frame side member has an abnormality such as disconnection or disconnection of wiring. Although a mode is exemplified in which an error designation command for a frame side interface (IF) error is transmitted without specifying whether the error is detected in the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 detecting an abnormality, the present invention is not limited to this. Is the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 to which the first out confirmation switch 045SG21 and the second out confirmation switch 045SG22 are connected, or the interface integrated circuit to which the first winning confirmation switch 045SG23 and the second winning confirmation switch 045SG24 are connected? Whether it is the circuit 045SG30 or both of the interface integrated circuits 045SG30 is specified from the input states of the first out signal and the second out signal and the input states of the first winning confirmation signal and the second winning confirmation signal. , By transmitting a different error designation command according to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 that has detected the identified abnormality to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), an error corresponding to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 that has detected the identified abnormality You may make it alert|report.

In this way, before the game can be executed, the error designation command for notifying the frame side interface (IF) error is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), FIG. 11-9 , the effect control CPU 120 identifies that a frame-side interface (IF) error has occurred from the received error designation command, and confirms that a frame-side interface (IF) error has occurred. An error screen including an error message corresponding to the frame-side interface (IF) error is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify.

Note that the notification of these frame-side interface (IF) errors on the error screen is terminated when either of the cancellation conditions, for example, the passage of 5 minutes or the operation of the push button 31B, is satisfied, and the image is displayed. Since the display of the error screen on the display device 5 is also ended, the game can be executed after that. Further, these error notification processes may be executed as the process of S78 after the effect random number update process (S77) of the effect main process, for example.

In this way, frame-side interface (IF) errors are reported only when the pachinko machine is activated by a staff member or the like before the opening of the pachinko hall, so that the performance display, etc. of the pachinko machine Although it is closely related, the occurrence of disconnection or disconnection of the first out confirmation switch 045SG21 and the second out confirmation switch 045SG22, which have a remarkably low possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player in the game, has occurred. While it is possible to prevent the performance display from becoming inaccurate in advance by being able to check the staff, etc., during the game, the judgment itself of these frame side interface (IF) errors is the main board 11 (game control Since it is not executed in the internal microcomputer 100), it is possible to prevent the game from being disturbed by the notification of the frame-side interface (IF) error, which is extremely unlikely to cause disadvantages to the player.

Next, using FIG. 11-10, the main side error processing of this characteristic part 045SG related to an abnormality (error) based on the vibration Wired-OR signal, the radio wave Wired-OR signal, and the B-IF signal from the board side member explain. In the main side error processing, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the game prohibition flag is ON (045SGS10). If the game prohibition flag is ON (045SGS10; Y), that is, if an error (abnormality) that prohibits the game has already been determined and the game is prohibited, the processes after 045SGS11 are not executed. By ending the error processing on the main side at this time, a new error (abnormality) that is different from the error (abnormality) that has already prohibited the game is determined. It is possible to prevent the information from becoming unclear due to switching to another error (abnormality) notification.

On the other hand, if the game prohibition flag is not ON (045SGS10; N), it is determined whether or not the vibration Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS11).

If the vibration Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS11; Y), it is further determined whether the radio wave Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS12). When the radio wave Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS12; Y), that is, when both the vibration Wired-OR signal and the radio wave Wired-OR signal are in the detection (L) state, the specific interface (IF) After judging that there is an error (045SGS13) and setting the transmission of an error designation command to notify of a specific interface (IF) error (045SGS14), the game continues in a state in which it is impossible to detect radio fraud or vibration fraud. Since there is a high possibility that the gaming facility will be disadvantaged if it is (executed), the game prohibition flag is turned on to prohibit the execution of the game (045SGS40), and then the main side error processing is terminated.

In addition, in this characteristic part 045SG, in order to be able to transmit error designation commands set to be transmitted by 045SGS14 and 045SGS16, 045SGS19, 045SGS22, and 045SGS29 described later, in the command control processing (S27), main side error processing is performed. , and the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 can be executed even in the game prohibited state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game prohibited flag is turned on. In the process of 045SGS40, the process of transmitting an error designation command is executed, and by interrupting the process in the 045SGS40, after the game is prohibited, the timer interrupt process for game control is put into a dead end state in which execution is impossible. You may do so.

On the other hand, if the radio wave Wired-OR signal is not in the detection (L) state (045SGS12; N), that is, the vibration Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state, but the radio wave Wired-OR signal is in the non-detection (H) state. If it is, it is determined that there is a vibration error (045SGS15), and after setting the transmission of an error designation command for notifying the vibration error (045SGS16), the game prohibition flag is turned on to prohibit the execution of the game (045SGS40). .

If the vibration Wired-OR signal is not in the detection (L) state (045SGS11; N), it is further determined whether the radio wave Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS17).

If the radio wave Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS17; Y), that is, the radio wave Wired-OR signal is in the detection (L) state, but the vibration Wired-OR signal is in the non-detection (H) state. If there is, it is determined that there is a radio wave error (045SGS18), and after setting the transmission of an error designation command for notifying the radio wave error (045SGS19), the game prohibition flag is turned on to prohibit the execution of the game (045SGS40).

If the radio Wired-OR signal is also in the non-detection (H) state (045SGS17; N), that is, if both the vibration Wired-OR signal and the radio wave Wired-OR signal are in the non-detection (H) state, It is determined whether or not the B-IF signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS20).

When the B-IF signal is in the detection (L) state (045SGS20; Y), it is determined that there is an interface (IF) error on the board side (045SGS21), and an error designation command for notifying the interface (IF) error on the board side is issued. After setting the transmission (045SGS22), the game prohibition flag is turned on to prohibit the execution of the game (045SGS40).

Also, when the B-IF signal is in a non-detection (H) state (045SGS20; N), that is, when none of the three interface integrated circuits 045SG30 provided on the board-side member detects an abnormality. executes probability variable region signal monitoring processing for monitoring the probability variable region signal output from the probability variable region switch 045SG12.

In the probability variable region signal monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variable region signal is in the detection (H) state (045SGS23). If the probability variable region signal is not in the detection (H) state (045SGS23; N), it is determined whether the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is in operation (045SGS30), and the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is not in operation. In the case (045SGS30; N), proceed to 045SGS32, execute other abnormality determination processing, and then terminate the main side error processing, while the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is in operation (045SGS30; Y), after ending the timer count of the variable probability region signal abnormality determination timer (045SGS31), proceed to 045SGS32, execute other abnormality determination processing, and then terminate the main side error processing.

Also, when the probability variable region signal is in the detection (H) state (045SGS23; Y), it is determined whether or not the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is in operation (045SGS24). When the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is not in operation (045SGS24; N), the value corresponding to the predetermined determination time (for example, 1 second) is set to the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer (045SGS25), 045SGS32 , and after executing other abnormality determination processing, the main-side error processing ends.

On the other hand, when the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is in operation (045SGS24; Y), after the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is updated by subtracting 1 (045SGS26), the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer after the subtraction update is the timer. It is determined whether or not it is up (045SGS27).

If the probability variable area signal abnormality determination timer has not timed up (045SGS27; N), proceed to 045SGS32, execute other abnormality determination processing, and then terminate the main side error processing. On the other hand, if the probability variable region signal abnormality determination timer is up (045SGS27; N), that is, normally, the probability variable region signal that becomes the detection (H) state in about several tens of milliseconds at the longest is usually If the detection (H) state continues for 1 second, which is an impossible predetermined time, the game ball is clogged in the probability variable area, or the probability variable area switch 045SG12 is out of order Or, since there is a possibility that the probability variable region switch 045SG12 has been tampered with, it is determined as a probability variable region error (045SGS28), and after setting the transmission setting of the error designation command to notify the probability variable region error (045SGS29) , the game prohibition flag is turned on to prohibit the execution of the game (045SGS40).

Then, any error specification command for notifying the specific interface (IF) error, vibration error, radio wave error, probability variable area error set for transmission in the main side error processing described above is a command as shown in FIG. 11-11. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) in the control process (S27), and the game is prohibited (stopped) after the transmission.

Then, the transmitted error notification command is analyzed by the command analysis processing (FIG. 6; S75) executed by the effect control CPU 120, and the abnormality ( Error) type is specified in the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an error notification process for notifying that the specified type of abnormality (error) has occurred, for example, as the process of S78 after the effect random number update process (S77) of the effect main process. do. In the error reporting process, if the type of error specified in the command analysis process is a specific interface (IF) error, an error message and an error code corresponding to the specific interface (IF) error are included. An error notification screen is displayed on the image display device 5, and when the identified error type is a vibration error, an error notification screen including an error message and an error code corresponding to the vibration error is displayed on the image display device 5. If the type of the specified error is a radio wave error, an error notification screen containing an error message and an error code corresponding to the radio wave error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the type of the specified error is changed. If it is a region error, an error notification screen including an error message and an error code corresponding to the probability variable region error is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of each error. Along with the display of this error notification screen, an error notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

In addition, these specific interface (IF) errors, vibration errors, radio wave errors, and probability variable area errors are all game prohibition (stop) errors. , need to reboot.

As described above, according to the characteristic part 045SG, the W-IF signal determination process for determining an abnormality by the W-IF signal (first synthesized signal), which is a Wired-OR signal, is performed during the period from when the power is turned on until the game can be executed. is executed only once, the main side error processing that determines an abnormality by the B-IF signal, which is a Wired-OR signal, is performed after the timer interrupt is set and the game is enabled by the timer interrupt. Since it is executed multiple times for each timer interrupt, the abnormal control can be properly executed without increasing the number of input signals to the game control microcomputer 100, which is the control means. In particular, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to abnormality control of W-IF signals, and to execute abnormality notification at appropriate timing according to each signal.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 045SG, regarding the specific interface (IF) abnormality due to the W-IF signal (first synthesized signal), the game is not disabled, and the frame side interface ( IF) Regarding abnormalities, the game is disabled, and depending on the member, control that does not disable the game and control that disables the game can be executed, so appropriate abnormality control corresponding to the member can be executed. .

In addition, according to the characteristic part 045SG, for the probability variable area switch 045SG12, B-IF which is a Wired-OR signal of the abnormality detection signal of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on the board side member to which the probability variable area switch 045SG12 is connected In addition to performing abnormality determination and abnormality control by signal (control to set the game prohibition flag and the transmission setting of the error designation command to notify the board side interface (IF) error), the probability variable area based on the detection by the probability variable area switch 045SG12 Since the game is prohibited by performing abnormality determination and abnormality control (control to set the game prohibition flag and the transmission setting of the error designation command to notify the probability variable area error) even by monitoring the signal, the specific detection means The game prohibition control, which is appropriate abnormal control corresponding to the probability variable area switch 045SG12, can be executed, and the security function of the pachinko game machine can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 045SG, a form in which the specific detection means is the variable probability region switch 045SG12 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these specific detection means are the first starting port switch 22A. , second starting switch 22B, count switch 23, and other switches provided on the board-side member, vibration sensor 045SG15 and first radio wave sensor 045SG14, which are detection means other than switches, may be used, and the board-side member It is good also as each switch and sensor provided in. Further, for example, a specific area switch that detects passage of a game ball in a specific area that is provided in a variable winning device for a small win and is controlled to a big win state by the passage of a game ball. In particular, it can target switches that have a significant impact on the game. In addition, in the probability variable region signal monitoring process, a form in which the determination time is set to 1 second is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time, signal interval, and frequency (regulations) used for these abnormality determinations The conditions such as the number of detections within a period of time) may be appropriately set according to the switch to be monitored.

Further, in the characteristic portion 045SG, the object to perform the double abnormality determination is exemplified as a form in which the variable probability region switch 045SG12 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. A signal output from a specific interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on a board-side member or a frame-side member is subjected to abnormality determination, and the abnormality determination is performed doubly for these specific interface integrated circuits 045SG30. On the other hand, other interface integrated circuits 045SG30 may be configured to perform only abnormality determination based on the W-IF signal or the B-IF signal.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 045SG, by using the vibration Wired-OR signal or the radio wave Wired-OR signal, without increasing the input signal to the game control microcomputer 100 serving as the control means, shown in FIG. 11-4 Thus, the game control microcomputer 100 can identify not only vibration errors and radio wave errors, but also abnormalities based on detection (detection) of abnormalities in the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 provided in the interface integrated circuit 045SG30. Abnormality control corresponding to the abnormality in the interface integrated circuit 045SG30, for example, control for transmitting an error notification command for notifying the interface abnormality in the image display device 5 can be performed.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 045SG, the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. It is possible to appropriately determine whether it is a vibration error detected by the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 or the second radio wave sensor 045SG25, or an interface abnormality.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 045SG, radio wave sensors are provided in both the separable board-side member and the frame-side member, and the detection signal output from the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 provided in the board-side member and , and the detection signal output from the second radio wave sensor 045SG25 provided on the frame side member are input to the same interface integrated circuit 045SG30 as one integrated signal. while reducing the number of interface integrated circuits 045SG30.

In the characteristic part 045SG described above, the second radio wave sensor 045SG25 provided on the frame side member is also connected to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 to which the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 provided on the board side member is connected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection signals output from these second radio wave sensors 045SG25 are connected to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on the frame-side member, and shown in FIGS. , only the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 provided on the board-side member may be connected to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on the board-side member. By doing so, since both the vibration sensor 045SG15 and the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 are provided on the same board-side member, the signal line of the detection signal is wired across the board-side member and the frame-side member. It may be possible to prevent the board-side member from being separated from the frame-side member from being troublesome.

11-2, the output side of the wired OR connection switch 045SG40 is connected to the output side (output terminal Y1) of the first system circuit 045SG31 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30. and the signal line connected to the output side (output terminal Y2) of the second system circuit 045SG32 are connected, but the present invention is not limited to this. 11-12, a signal line connected to the output side of the wired-OR connection switch 045SG40 and the output side (output terminal Y1) of the first system circuit 045SG31, or the signal line of the second system circuit 045SG32 Only one of the signal lines connected to the output side (output terminal Y2) may be connected to convert only one signal into a Wired-OR signal.

Incidentally, in the case of the modification shown in FIGS. 11-12, the game control microcomputer 100 may determine abnormality by the combination of signals shown in FIGS. 11-13. In FIGS. 11-13, (L) indicates that the signal is in the Low state (low potential state), and (H) indicates that the signal is in the High state (low potential state).

When the vibration sensor 045SG15 is at detection (L), the vibration detection signal output from the output side (output terminal Y1) of the first system circuit 045SG31 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is also at detection (L), and the vibration sensor 045SG15 is at detection (L). In the case of non-detection (H), the game control microcomputer 100 also becomes non-detection (H) of the vibration detection signal, so that the vibration detection signal becomes detection (L) to determine the occurrence of a vibration error. can.

On the other hand, when the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 is in detection (L) and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is also in detection (L), the radio wave Wired-OR signal becomes detection (L). , the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that either a radio wave error or an interface abnormality has occurred by detecting (L) the radio wave Wired-OR signal.

When the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 is detected (L) and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is not detected (H), the radio wave Wired-OR signal is detected (L). The game control microcomputer 100 can determine that either a radio wave error or an interface abnormality has occurred when the radio wave Wired-OR signal becomes detection (L).

When the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 is non-detection (H) and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is detection (L), the radio wave Wired-OR signal becomes detection (L). The game control microcomputer 100 can determine that either a radio wave error or an interface abnormality has occurred when the radio wave Wired-OR signal becomes detection (L).

When the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 is non-detection (H) and the abnormality detection processing circuit 045SG33 of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is also non-detection (H), the radio wave Wired-OR signal becomes non-detection (H). Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 can determine that neither the radio wave error nor the interface abnormality has occurred by detecting (H) the radio wave Wired-OR signal, and at this time, the vibration sensor When 045SG15 is detected (L), it can be determined that only a vibration error has occurred. It can be determined that there is

The examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 are useful when the sensors connected to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 are of significantly different importance. That is, without Wired-OR signal for the signal of the sensor with high importance, by making Wired-OR signal for the signal of the sensor with low importance, the number of signals to be input to the game control microcomputer 100 Without increasing, the game control microcomputer 100 can grasp the occurrence of any one of a plurality of abnormalities converted into Wired-OR signals.

Further, in the characteristic part 045SG described above, since the pachinko game machine 1 is a model equipped with a special variable winning ball device having a probability variable area that is affected by the application of vibration, a vibration sensor 045SG15 is provided on the board side member. However, instead of or in addition to these special variable winning ball devices, there is a role of a so-called clown, etc., which has a rolling surface on which a game ball that has entered can roll and a specific area is formed. It may be provided with an object device and controlled to a big hit state by entering a game ball into a specific area. It may be a machine (a so-called type 1 pachinko machine) that is controlled to a big hit state only by the result. In the case of one of these pachinko machines, the vibration sensor 045SG15 may be omitted because it is less likely to be affected by vibration. The input voltage to the input terminal A1 to which the vibration sensor 045SG15 is connected may be adjusted to about 6.0V by connecting the resistor R as shown in 11-14. By doing so, the main board 11 provided with the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 can be used not only for models provided with the vibration sensor 045SG15 but also for models not provided with the vibration sensor 045SG15. The cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced. 11 to 14, each resistor and capacitor may be provided on a relay board 045SG01 or the like other than the main board 11. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-15, the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 provided on the board-side member is connected to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 similarly provided on the board-side member, and is provided on the frame-side member. When connecting the second radio wave sensor 045SG25 to the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 also provided on the frame side member, the abnormality detection signal output from each interface integrated circuit 045SG30 is individually input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 100 , the number of signals input to the game control microcomputer 100 will increase, so the wired OR connection switch 045SG40 to which the abnormality detection signal of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on the board side member is input and the output signal of the wired OR connection switch 045SG40 to which the abnormality detection signal of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 provided on the frame side member is input. By inputting to the input port, while preventing the number of signals input to the game control microcomputer 100 from increasing, the game control microcomputer 100 can determine the interface abnormality of the interface integrated circuit 045SG30. can be

Further, in the characteristic portion 045SG, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the sensors connected to the first interface integrated circuit 045SG30 include the vibration sensor 045SG15, the first radio wave sensor 045SG14, and the second radio wave sensor 045SG25. The present invention is not limited to this, and these sensors may be selected appropriately.

Also, the input port signal allocation form shown in FIG. The signal allocation of each port may be changed according to model specifications such as the number, types of sensors, presence/absence of condition device operating regions, and the like. 11 to 17, the Wired-OR signal is omitted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 045SG, an example using the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 capable of inputting two systems of detection signals has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to input only detection signals of one system, or it may be possible to input detection signals of three or more systems, and those capable of inputting different numbers of detection signals are used in combination. You may do so.

Further, in the characteristic portion 045SG, the board-side member and the frame-side member are illustrated as examples of the separable first member and second member, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first member may be a board-side member, and the second member may be a separable first member and second member, such as a glass door frame. Further, for example, in a pachinko machine having, as a game area, a left-handed area in which a game ball is hit in a normal state and a right-handed area in which a game ball is hit in a time-saving state or during a jackpot game, the left-handed area is the first. The first part and the right-handed area may be different parts of an inseparable member, such as the second part. A switch is provided in the left hitting area where the game ball is detected in the normal state where the game is mainly executed, and a switch is provided in the right hitting area where the game ball is detected in the time saving state or during the jackpot game. By separating the switch connected to the interface means, it is switched according to the game state whether the interface means connected to the switch of the first part or the switch of the second part is determined as the object for determining the abnormality of the interface means. This makes it possible to omit useless determination processing and reduce the processing load of the determination processing. In this way, in the case of switching the target of abnormality determination according to the game state, when the power is turned on, the interface means of both the first part and the second part are subject to the abnormality determination. Just do it.

Further, in the characteristic portion 045SG, an example is shown in which the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 and the second radio wave sensor 045SG25 are provided on both the board-side member and the frame-side member, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for both the board-side member and the frame-side member, for example, a first vibration sensor and a second vibration sensor that detect vibration in different directions are replaced with or added to the first radio wave sensor 045SG14 and the second radio wave sensor 045SG25. You may make it provide.

Further, in the characteristic portion 045SG, the wired-OR connection switch 045SG40 is provided separately from the interface integrated circuit 045SG30, but the present invention is not limited to this. The switch 045SG40 may be provided inside the interface integrated circuit 045SG30, or provided both inside and outside the interface integrated circuit 045SG30, and if a problem occurs in either one, the Wired-OR signal is sent to the game control microcomputer 100 You may make it input.

In addition, in the characteristic part 045SG, as described above, the W-IF signal is the first out confirmation switch 045SG21, the second out confirmation switch 045SG22, the first winning confirmation switch 045SG23, and the second winning confirmation switch 045SG23 provided on the frame side member. Like the switch 045SG24, it is for detecting an out ball without discharging the game ball, and reconfirming the game ball already detected by the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B. Therefore, the abnormality determination by the W-IF signal which is the Wired-OR signal of the abnormality detection signal output from the interface integrated circuit 045SG30 shown in FIG. 11-6 to which the switches provided on the frame side members are connected However, when the power is turned on, it is executed only in the W-IF signal determination processing before the processing of S11 in which the timer interrupt is set, and is not executed in the main side error processing executed by the timer interrupt. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the error judgment by the B-IF signal and the W-IF signal may be executed in the main side error processing executed by timer interrupt.

In addition, in the feature section 045SG, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the probability variable area signal monitoring process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection signals of these specific detection means are monitored. A dedicated monitoring circuit may be provided to monitor the detection signal.

In addition, in the characteristic part 045SG, timing and the number of times are shown as examples of the difference between the condition for executing the abnormality control for the B-IF signal and the condition for executing the abnormality control for the W-IF signal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the W-IF signal has a long signal continuous input period for error determination, while the B-IF signal has a long signal continuous input period for error determination. Conditions for other items, such as different signal input periods to be determined, such as short, may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 045SG, a form in which only one specific detection means is the probability variable area switch 045SG12 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these specific detection means are provided on the same board side. It may be a plurality of detection means (switches) provided on the member, or a plurality of detection means (switches) including a combination of a board-side member detection means (switch) and a board-side member detection means (switch). good.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characteristic portion 045SG can also be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characteristic portions to form a game machine. 208SG029, the frame-side interface error is notified of the disconnection (wiring disconnection) of the first out confirmation switch 045SG21 and the second out confirmation switch 045SG22, etc., which greatly affects the performance display. It is possible to grasp the information when the machine is started, and to prevent inappropriate performance display from being displayed on the display monitor.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in each characteristic portion described above, a so-called pachinko machine was used for explanation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other game machines such as a slot machine (pachislot) may be used. . A slot machine is generally provided with a variable display section having a plurality of reels (usually three) on which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn as identification information on the outer periphery. Rotation is started by operating a lever, and rotation is started within a predetermined maximum delay time range from the operation timing by the player operating a stop button provided corresponding to each reel. Stop. Winning occurs according to the display result derived when all the reels stop rotating.

For example, the above-described setting key, clear switch, and door open sensor for detecting the open/closed state of the openable/closable housing (including peripheral members such as the housing and power supply board) are provided, and the detection signal from the setting key is provided. , a detection signal from the clear switch, and a detection signal from the door opening sensor may be input to one of a plurality of input ports of the control means.

In addition, for example, a variable display unit (including peripheral members such as a reel, a liquid crystal display device, and a main substrate) that can be attached to and detached from the housing is provided, and a detection signal of a detection means provided in the housing is mainly input. and a variable display unit side input port into which detection signals from the detection means provided in the variable display unit are mainly inputted.

Further, for example, the detection signal of the setting key provided in the variable display section may be a slot machine input to the housing section side input port, or the transmission path of the detection signal of the setting key provided on the main board. and a transmission path of a detection signal of a detection means provided in a variable display section may be joined on a main board.

Note that the gaming machine capable of playing a game is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be a slot machine or a general gaming machine as long as it is capable of playing at least a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
a plurality of detection means including specific detection means;
interface means for receiving a detection signal output from the detection means, capable of detecting a predetermined abnormality related to the input, and capable of outputting a predetermined abnormality signal based on the detection of the predetermined abnormality;
combined signal output means for generating a combined signal by wired OR connection of the plurality of predetermined abnormal signals output from each of the plurality of interface means to which detection signals from the respective detection means are input;
a specific signal monitoring means for monitoring the output status of the detection signal output from the specific detection means;
game control means capable of executing abnormality control regarding an abnormality based on the composite signal output from the composite signal output means and the monitoring situation by the specific signal monitoring means;
Production control means capable of executing notification regarding abnormality;
with
The combined signal output means is
A first synthesis for generating a first synthesis signal by a wired OR connection of a plurality of the predetermined abnormal signals output from each of the plurality of interface means to which detection signals from the detection means provided in the first member are input. a signal output means;
A second synthesis for generating a second synthesized signal by a wired OR connection of the plurality of predetermined abnormal signals output from each of the plurality of interface means to which the detection signals from the detection means provided in the second member are input. a signal output means;
The first member is a member of a game board,
The second member is a member of a game machine frame,
The interface means can output a signal corresponding to the detection signal output from the detection means, and can output the predetermined abnormality signal regardless of whether or not the detection signal is output from the detection means,
The game control means is
Based on the first synthesized signal, a first abnormality notification signal is transmitted to the effect control means, and control is performed to prohibit execution of the game,
Based on the second synthesized signal, a second abnormality notification signal is transmitted to the effect control means, but control to prohibit execution of the game is not performed,
When the specific signal monitoring means detects an abnormality in the output status of the detection signal output from the specific detection means, it transmits a third abnormality notification signal to the effect control means and controls to prohibit the execution of the game. conduct,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images